What is Cartly?

Cartly is a modern, high-performance e-commerce platform built for merchants who need speed, reliability, and flexibility. Whether you are launching your first online store or managing a high-volume operation, Cartly provides the tools to sell online with confidence.

\n\n

Core Philosophy: Zero Lost Orders

Every feature in Cartly is designed around one principle: no authorized payment should ever fail to create an order. The checkout pipeline uses the Saga pattern powered by Temporal workflows to guarantee that every step — inventory reservation, payment capture, and order creation — completes reliably, even if individual services experience transient failures.

\n\n

Key Features

Lightning-fast storefront — Server-side rendered pages with under 100ms TTFB on cached routes. Built with React Router 7 and Vite for optimal performance.
Visual page builder — Drag-and-drop editor for creating landing pages, product templates, and custom layouts without writing code.
Full product management — Unlimited products with variants, inventory tracking across multiple locations, bulk CSV import, and instant Typesense-powered search.
Stripe payments — PCI-compliant payment processing with support for multiple currencies and automatic exchange rate updates.
GraphQL API — A complete storefront API for headless commerce, enabling custom frontends and mobile apps.
App marketplace — Extend your store with third-party apps and integrations, or build your own using OAuth and webhooks.
Built-in marketing — Discounts, gift cards, email campaigns, newsletter management, and product reviews.

\n\n

Architecture

Cartly is built as a pragmatic modular monolith in Go. Each domain — catalog, cart, checkout, identity, billing — is a self-contained module with clear boundaries. The backend uses Ent ORM for type-safe database access, Redis for caching and sessions, and Typesense for full-text search. Temporal orchestrates long-running workflows like checkout processing, bulk imports, and abandoned cart recovery.

\n\n

Who is Cartly For?

Cartly is ideal for small to mid-size merchants who want a fast, reliable store without the complexity of enterprise platforms. It is also a great fit for developers who want a clean, well-documented API and the ability to extend the platform through apps and integrations.

","created_at","2026-06-05T11:51:11.074072Z","2d73f88c-2e83-4bf8-9b69-4f8e67e37c35","layout","help_center","meta_description","","meta_title","Platform Overview | Cartly Help Center","parent_slug","platform-overview","sort_order",10,"status","published","Platform Overview","updated_at","2026-10-06T07:41:10.149026Z",{"_1551":1580,"_1561":1584,"_1554":1585,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1586,"_1570":1545,"_1544":1587,"_1572":1588,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1589,"_1577":1590},[1581],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1582},{"_1555":1583},"

Mobile Support in the Admin Panel

The Cartly admin panel (updated in v1.16) is fully responsive down to 375px wide. You can manage orders, update products, and check analytics from your phone without a dedicated app.

\n\n

Navigation on Mobile

On small screens, the left sidebar is replaced with a bottom navigation drawer. Tap the menu icon in the top bar to open the full navigation. The bottom bar shows shortcuts to the most-used sections: Orders, Products, and Analytics.

The top bar collapses to show just the page title and key actions. Search and notification icons remain accessible at all times.

\n\n

What Works Well on Mobile

Orders — view, filter, and fulfil orders. Mark as paid, add tracking numbers, and print packing slips.
Products — view your catalogue, update prices, and toggle availability.
Customers — look up customer profiles and order history.
Analytics — check your conversion funnel and revenue at a glance.
Notifications — new order alerts and low-stock warnings.

\n\n

What Works Better on Desktop

Theme code editor — editing Liquid code on a small screen is possible but not recommended.
Visual editor — drag-and-drop section reordering works on mobile but is more precise with a mouse.
Bulk imports — CSV upload and review is easier on a larger screen.

\n\n

Dark Mode

The admin defaults to dark mode. To switch to light mode, tap your account avatar in the top bar and select Light mode. Your preference is saved and remembered across sessions and devices.

\n\n

Safe Area Support

The admin panel respects the safe area on notched and Dynamic Island devices — content is never hidden behind the status bar or home indicator.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.404794Z","9c0cd75e-bc74-4d31-a66d-1b29935c119e","Admin Mobile Experience | Cartly Help Center","admin-mobile-experience",12,"Using the Admin on Mobile","2026-10-06T07:41:10.995921Z",{"_1551":1592,"_1561":1596,"_1554":1597,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1598,"_1570":1545,"_1544":1599,"_1572":1600,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1601,"_1577":1602},[1593],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1594},{"_1555":1595},"

Create Your Cartly Store

Getting started with Cartly takes just a few minutes. Follow these steps to set up your store and start selling.

\n\n

Step 1: Register an Account

Visit the Cartly admin panel and click Create Account. You will need to provide your email address and choose a password. A verification email is sent immediately — click the link to confirm your account.

\n\n

Step 2: Name Your Store

After verifying your email, you will be prompted to enter your store name. This name appears in your storefront header, emails, and browser tab. You can change it later in Settings. Cartly automatically generates a subdomain based on your store name (e.g., my-store.cartly.pro).

\n\n

Step 3: Set Your Contact Details

Navigate to Settings → General and fill in your business contact information:

Contact name and email
Phone number (optional)
Business address (street, city, state, postal code, country)

This information is used for shipping calculations, tax configuration, and appears on invoices.

\n\n

Step 4: Choose a Subscription Plan

Cartly offers four plans: Starter, Growth, Pro, and Enterprise. All plans include a 7-day free trial. Navigate to Settings → Billing to select your plan. You can upgrade or downgrade at any time.

\n\n

Step 5: Configure Payments

Go to Settings → Payments and connect your Stripe account. Cartly supports both test mode (for development) and live mode (for real transactions). You can start in test mode to verify your checkout flow before going live.

\n\n

Step 6: Add Your First Product

Navigate to Products → Add Product and fill in the title, description, price, and upload at least one image. See the Adding Your First Product guide for detailed instructions.

\n\n

What Next?

Once your store is set up, explore the admin panel to customize your theme, set up shipping zones, create collections, and configure your navigation menus. The Admin Panel Tour guide walks you through every section.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.081786Z","6dd011cd-cde5-4d50-9b18-39bf54db6b8d","Creating Your Store | Cartly Help Center","creating-your-store",20,"Creating Your Store","2026-10-06T07:41:10.160693Z",{"_1551":1604,"_1561":1608,"_1554":1609,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1610,"_1570":1545,"_1544":1611,"_1572":1612,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1613,"_1577":1614},[1605],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1606},{"_1555":1607},"

Navigating the Admin Panel

The Cartly admin panel is your command center for managing every aspect of your online store. Here is a quick tour of the main sections.

\n\n

Dashboard

The dashboard gives you an at-a-glance overview of your store's performance. You will see today's revenue, order count, top products, and recent activity. Key metrics update in real time as orders come in.

\n\n

Sidebar Navigation

The left sidebar provides quick access to all admin sections:

Orders — View, filter, and manage all orders. Create manual orders for phone or in-person sales.
Products — Add, edit, and organize your product catalog. Manage variants, inventory, and media.
Collections — Group products into collections for easy browsing on your storefront.
Customers — View customer profiles, order history, and manage customer groups.
Discounts — Create percentage, fixed-amount, or free-shipping discounts with conditions and limits.
Online Store — Customize your theme, edit pages, manage navigation menus, and configure blog posts.
Apps — Browse and install apps from the Cartly marketplace.
Settings — General settings, shipping, payments, team members, and billing.

\n\n

Command Palette

Press Ctrl+K (or Cmd+K on Mac) anywhere in the admin panel to open the command palette. This is the fastest way to navigate — type to search for products, orders, customers, or jump to any settings page. You can also use it to quickly create new products or orders.

\n\n

Quick Actions

Throughout the admin panel, you will find contextual action buttons. On the Orders page, for example, you can bulk-select orders to fulfill, print packing slips, or export to CSV. On the Products page, you can bulk-edit prices, inventory, or publish status.

\n\n

Activity Feed

The activity feed, accessible from the dashboard, shows a chronological log of all admin actions. Every product edit, order status change, and settings update is recorded in the audit log with the team member who made the change.

\n\n

Responsive Design

The admin panel is fully responsive. You can manage your store from a tablet or phone when you are away from your desk. The sidebar collapses into a hamburger menu on smaller screens.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.092385Z","f6d7adfe-0323-449f-9fab-e6d0822651fb","Admin Panel Tour | Cartly Help Center","admin-panel-tour",30,"Admin Panel Tour","2026-10-06T07:41:10.168115Z",{"_1551":1616,"_1561":1620,"_1554":1621,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1622,"_1570":1545,"_1544":1623,"_1572":1624,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1625,"_1577":1626},[1617],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1618},{"_1555":1619},"

Adding Your First Product

This guide walks you through creating your first product on Cartly, including setting up variants and uploading images.

\n\n

Step 1: Navigate to Products

Click Products in the sidebar, then click the Add Product button in the top right corner.

\n\n

Step 2: Basic Information

Fill in the following fields:

Title — The product name as it will appear on your storefront. Keep it clear and descriptive.
Description — A detailed description of the product. Supports rich text formatting including bold, italic, lists, and links.
Product Type — A category label (e.g., \"T-Shirt\", \"Electronics\"). Used for filtering and organization.
Vendor — The brand or manufacturer name.
Tags — Comma-separated tags for search and collection filtering.

\n\n

Step 3: Pricing

Enter the price in your store's base currency. All prices are stored internally as integers (cents) to avoid floating-point rounding errors. For example, enter 29.99 and Cartly stores it as 2999 cents.

You can also set a Compare At Price — the original price shown with a strikethrough to indicate a sale.

\n\n

Step 4: Upload Images

Drag and drop images onto the media section, or click to browse your files. Cartly supports JPEG, PNG, and WebP formats. Images are automatically uploaded to S3-compatible storage and served via CDN. You can reorder images by dragging them — the first image becomes the featured image.

\n\n

Step 5: Add Variants

If your product comes in multiple options (size, color, material), click Add Options. For each option:

Enter the option name (e.g., \"Size\")
Add option values (e.g., \"S\", \"M\", \"L\", \"XL\")

Cartly automatically generates all variant combinations. Each variant gets its own SKU, price, and inventory level. You can edit variants individually or use the bulk editor to update multiple variants at once.

\n\n

Step 6: Inventory

For each variant, set the available stock quantity. If you have multiple warehouse locations, you can track inventory per location. Enable Track Inventory to let Cartly automatically decrement stock when orders are placed.

\n\n

Step 7: Publish

When you are ready, set the status to Active and click Save. Your product is now live on your storefront and will appear in search results within seconds (Typesense indexes new products immediately).

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.099157Z","e4e802bb-902f-47b9-834e-ca20ebfdf56f","Adding Your First Product | Cartly Help Center","first-product",40,"Adding Your First Product","2026-10-06T07:41:10.174726Z",{"_1551":1628,"_1561":1632,"_1554":1633,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1634,"_1570":1545,"_1544":1635,"_1572":1636,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1637,"_1577":1638},[1629],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1630},{"_1555":1631},"

Understanding the Order Flow

This guide explains how orders work in Cartly — from the moment a customer adds a product to their cart through to order completion.

\n\n

How Checkout Works

When a customer clicks \"Checkout\", Cartly initiates a Temporal workflow that orchestrates the entire process:

Cart validation — Verifies all items are still in stock and prices are current.
Inventory reservation — Temporarily holds the requested quantities so other customers cannot purchase the same items.
Shipping calculation — Computes shipping rates based on the customer's address and your configured shipping zones.
Discount application — Applies any discount codes and validates their conditions (minimum amount, usage limits, etc.).
Payment processing — Creates a Stripe PaymentIntent and captures the payment.
Order creation — Creates the order record with all line items, shipping details, and payment confirmation.
Inventory commit — Converts the temporary reservation into a permanent stock deduction.
Confirmation — Sends the order confirmation email and redirects the customer to the success page.

\n\n

Zero Lost Orders Guarantee

The Saga pattern ensures that if any step fails after payment is captured, the system automatically retries or compensates. If payment succeeds but order creation fails due to a transient database error, Temporal retries the activity until it succeeds. This means you never lose a paid order.

\n\n

Viewing Your First Order

Navigate to Orders in the admin panel. You will see a list of all orders with their status, customer name, total, and date. Click any order to view its full details.

\n\n

Order Detail Page

The order detail page shows:

Timeline — A chronological log of every event: creation, payment, fulfillment, and any notes.
Line items — Each product, variant, quantity, and price.
Customer info — Name, email, shipping address, and billing address.
Payment status — Whether the payment was captured, refunded, or partially refunded.
Fulfillment status — Unfulfilled, partially fulfilled, or fulfilled, with tracking numbers if added.

\n\n

Fulfilling the Order

Click Fulfill to mark items as shipped. Enter the tracking number and carrier if applicable. The customer receives a shipping confirmation email automatically. You can fulfill all items at once or partially fulfill specific line items.

\n\n

Test Mode

When your Stripe account is in test mode, use the card number 4242 4242 4242 4242 with any future expiry date and any CVC to simulate a successful payment. This lets you walk through the entire order flow without processing real charges.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.104508Z","0c454074-1d20-4878-97b7-b8c0477cf561","Your First Order | Cartly Help Center","first-order",50,"Your First Order","2026-10-06T07:41:10.18108Z",{"_1551":1640,"_1561":1644,"_1554":1645,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1646,"_1568":1647,"_1570":1545,"_1544":1648,"_1572":1649,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1650,"_1577":1651},[1641],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1642},{"_1555":1643},"

Opening a Support Ticket

You can open a support ticket without leaving your Cartly admin panel. Use Command — the AI assistant in your admin — to create and follow up on tickets.

\n\n

How to Create a Ticket

Open Command from your admin panel (the AI assistant icon in the navigation).
Describe your issue in plain language. For example: \"I cannot see my shipping zones in checkout\" or \"My product images are not uploading\".
Command will ask for any details it needs and then create a support ticket on your behalf. You will see the ticket number (for example, #1042) in the conversation.
You will also receive an email confirmation with the ticket number and a summary of your issue.

\n\n

Checking a Ticket's Status

To check the status of an existing ticket, open Command and ask something like \"What is the status of ticket #1042?\" Command will fetch the latest status and any replies from the support team.

\n\n

Replying to a Ticket

If the support team has replied and you need to add more information, open Command and say \"Reply to ticket #1042\" followed by your message. Command will send your reply and show the updated thread.

\n\n

Email Notifications

You receive an email notification each time the support team replies to one of your tickets. Replies also appear inside Command the next time you check the ticket status.

\n\n

Ticket Priority

Ticket priority is set automatically based on your plan tier and is not something you need to choose. Higher-tier plans receive faster initial response times according to the platform Service Level Agreement (SLA).

\n\n

Ticket Numbers

Every ticket has a human-readable number like #1042. Use this number when asking Command for an update, or when referencing the issue in email correspondence with the support team.

","2026-06-28T05:43:33.079849Z","d597aac3-6b20-444c-a734-d8b76225013d","How to open and track support tickets directly from the Cartly admin panel using Command, without leaving your store.","Get Support from Your Store | Cartly Help Center","get-support-from-your-store",60,"Get Support from Your Store","2026-10-06T07:41:11.147858Z",{"_1551":1653,"_1561":1657,"_1554":1658,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1659,"_1568":1660,"_1570":1545,"_1544":1661,"_1572":1662,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1663,"_1577":1664},[1654],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1655},{"_1555":1656},"

What Gets Created Automatically

When you create a new Cartly store, the platform automatically provisions a ready-to-browse storefront with sample content so you can see how everything looks and works right away. The sample content includes:

Sample products — a small set of demo products with images, descriptions, and variants. These give your storefront a realistic appearance while you are setting up.
Collections — the sample products are organised into demo collections so your collection pages are not empty on day one.
Starter pages — two ready-to-edit policy pages: Shipping Policy and Returns Policy. Both appear in your footer navigation and contain placeholder text you can edit to match your store policies.
Currency — the store default currency is set from your country during sign-up. You can change it at any time in Settings → Currencies.

\n\n

Replacing Sample Content

Sample content is designed to be replaced, not kept. Here is how to remove or replace each piece:

Sample products — go to Products in your admin, select all demo products, and delete them. Then add your own products.
Collections — go to Collections, delete the demo collections, and create your own. Associate your products to collections once you have added them.
Shipping Policy / Returns Policy pages — go to Online Store → Pages, open each policy page, and edit the content to describe your actual policies. Do not delete these pages — they are referenced by your footer navigation and help with SEO.

\n\n

Theme and Appearance

Your store comes with the Clarity theme installed as the default. You can start customising it immediately in Online Store → Themes → Customize, or install a different theme from App Store → Themes.

\n\n

Does Replacing Content Affect My Store's SEO?

Replacing sample products and pages does not negatively affect SEO because your store is new and not yet indexed by search engines. Take your time setting up your actual content — SEO benefits accumulate after you start publishing real products and pages.

\n\n

I Want to Keep the Demo Content for Testing

You can keep sample content as long as you like. It behaves exactly like real products and pages — you can add them to collections, test checkout, and explore the admin with them. Just remember to replace or remove them before you launch to customers, as demo product titles and descriptions will appear to shoppers.

","2026-06-28T05:43:33.08171Z","c6f46289-5e5f-4818-b3df-d8d519fadfd2","What sample products, collections, and pages are created automatically when you open a new Cartly store, and how to replace them with your own content.","Your New Store's Sample Content | Cartly Help Center","your-new-store-sample-content",70,"Your New Store's Sample Content","2026-10-06T07:41:11.155635Z",{"_1544":1666,"_1546":1667,"_1548":1668},"products-catalog","Products & Catalog",[1669,1680,1691,1702,1712,1723,1734,1745,1757,1769],{"_1551":1670,"_1561":1674,"_1554":1675,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1676,"_1570":1666,"_1544":1677,"_1572":1573,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1678,"_1577":1679},[1671],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1672},{"_1555":1673},"

Adding Products to Your Store

Products are the core of your Cartly store. This guide covers every field available when creating or editing a product.

\n\n

Product Fields

Title (required) — The name displayed on your storefront and in search results. Keep it under 200 characters for best display.
Slug — The URL-friendly version of the title, auto-generated from the title. You can customize it for SEO purposes. Must be unique across your store.
Description — Rich text field supporting bold, italic, headings, lists, links, and embedded images. This is the main product description shown on the product page.
Product Type — A label for categorization (e.g., \"Shoes\", \"Electronics\", \"Food\"). Used for filtering in the admin and can power storefront filters.
Vendor — The brand or manufacturer. Useful for multi-brand stores.
Tags — Free-form labels for organization and filtering. Tags are used in automatic collections and search.
Status — Active (visible on storefront), Draft (hidden, work in progress), or Archived (hidden, no longer sold).

\n\n

Pricing Fields

Price — The selling price. Enter as a decimal (e.g., 29.99); stored internally as cents (2999).
Compare At Price — The original price, shown with a strikethrough when a product is on sale. Must be higher than the price.
Cost Per Item — Your cost for the item. Used for profit margin calculations in analytics. Not shown to customers.

\n\n

Inventory Fields

SKU — Stock Keeping Unit. A unique identifier for your internal tracking.
Barcode — UPC, EAN, or ISBN. Used for scanning and marketplace integrations.
Track Inventory — When enabled, Cartly tracks stock levels and prevents overselling.
Continue Selling When Out of Stock — Allow customers to purchase even when inventory reaches zero.

\n\n

Shipping Fields

Weight — The product weight used for shipping rate calculations.
Requires Shipping — Disable for digital products or services that do not need physical delivery.

\n\n

SEO Fields

Meta Title — Custom title tag for search engines. If left blank, the product title is used.
Meta Description — Custom description for search engine snippets. Keep under 160 characters.

\n\n

Saving and Publishing

Products can be saved as drafts at any time. When you set the status to Active and save, the product becomes immediately visible on your storefront. Typesense indexes the product within milliseconds, making it instantly searchable.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.107515Z","ce7b61dc-37d7-4c74-b502-5bea17e28782","Adding Products | Cartly Help Center","adding-products","Adding Products","2026-10-06T07:41:10.190723Z",{"_1551":1681,"_1561":1685,"_1554":1686,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1687,"_1570":1666,"_1544":1688,"_1572":1600,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1689,"_1577":1690},[1682],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1683},{"_1555":1684},"

Working with Product Variants

Variants allow you to sell different versions of a product — different sizes, colors, materials, or any combination of options.

\n\n

Understanding Options and Variants

In Cartly, a product can have up to three options (e.g., Size, Color, Material). Each option has values (e.g., Size: S, M, L). Variants are automatically generated from all combinations of option values. For example, a shirt with Size (S, M, L) and Color (Red, Blue) produces 6 variants.

\n\n

Adding Options

On the product edit page, scroll to the Options section and click Add Option:

Enter the option name (e.g., \"Size\")
Add values one by one or paste comma-separated values
Click Add Option again for additional options

When you add or modify options, Cartly regenerates the variant matrix automatically.

\n\n

Editing Individual Variants

Each variant can have its own, edited directly in the variants grid:

Price — Override the base product price for specific variants
SKU — Unique stock keeping unit per variant
Barcode — Unique barcode per variant
Cost — Cost of goods for this variant, used for margin reporting
Image — Associate a specific product image with a variant
Weight — Override weight for shipping calculations

Stock is not edited from the variants grid. Inventory is tracked independently for each variant at each location, and is managed in the Inventory block further down the product page — see Managing Your Inventory. This keeps saving product details from ever disturbing your existing stock levels.

For a full walkthrough of building options and the generated variant matrix, see Creating Product Variants with Options.

\n\n

Bulk Editing Variants

For products with many variants, use the bulk editor. Select multiple variants using the checkboxes, then choose an action:

Set price for all selected variants
Update SKUs with a pattern

This is especially useful after an initial import when you need to fine-tune pricing across many combinations. To adjust stock quantities in bulk, use the Inventory block or a catalog integration rather than the variants bulk editor.

\n\n

Reordering Variants

Variants are displayed in the order they were created by default. You can reorder option values to change the display order on your storefront. The first variant serves as the default selection when a customer visits the product page.

\n\n

Deleting Variants

You can remove specific option values, which deletes all associated variants. For example, if you discontinue the \"XS\" size, removing that value deletes all variants containing \"XS\". Active orders referencing deleted variants are not affected — historical order data is preserved.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.110371Z","4ba7f3b0-7b12-4a9b-96d2-b8f7c056ff13","Product Variants | Cartly Help Center","product-variants","Product Variants","2026-10-06T07:41:10.199428Z",{"_1551":1692,"_1561":1696,"_1554":1697,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1698,"_1570":1666,"_1544":1699,"_1572":1612,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1700,"_1577":1701},[1693],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1694},{"_1555":1695},"

Managing Product Images

High-quality images are essential for online sales. Cartly makes it easy to upload, organize, and optimize your product media.

\n\n

Uploading Images

There are two ways to add images to a product:

Drag and drop — Drag image files directly onto the media section of the product edit page. Multiple files can be dropped at once.
File browser — Click the upload area to open a file picker. Select one or more images.

Supported formats: JPEG, PNG, and WebP. Maximum file size is 10MB per image. For best results, use images at least 1024x1024 pixels.

\n\n

Image Storage

All uploaded images are stored in S3-compatible object storage and served through a CDN for fast global delivery. Cartly generates presigned upload URLs so your images go directly to storage without passing through the application server, keeping uploads fast even for large files.

\n\n

Organizing Images

Reorder images by dragging them into the desired position. The first image in the list becomes the featured image — this is the image shown in product listings, collection pages, and search results. Choose your best product photo as the featured image.

\n\n

Variant Images

You can associate specific images with product variants. For example, if you sell a t-shirt in Red and Blue, you can link the red product photo to the Red variant and the blue photo to the Blue variant. When a customer selects a color on the product page, the displayed image updates automatically.

\n\n

Alt Text

Add descriptive alt text to each image for accessibility and SEO. Screen readers use alt text to describe images to visually impaired users, and search engines use it to understand image content. Good alt text is concise and descriptive: \"Black leather wallet, open view showing card slots.\"

\n\n

Deleting Images

Hover over an image and click the delete icon to remove it. Deleted images are removed from S3 storage permanently. If an image is associated with a variant, the variant association is also removed.

\n\n

Image Best Practices

Use consistent aspect ratios across all product images for a clean storefront layout
Include multiple angles: front, back, detail, and lifestyle shots
Use a white or neutral background for the featured image
Optimize file size — WebP format offers the best quality-to-size ratio

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.112441Z","c8a6328a-bcae-4ff0-80ad-049019d01a7f","Product Media | Cartly Help Center","product-media","Product Media","2026-10-06T07:41:10.209948Z",{"_1551":1703,"_1561":1707,"_1554":1708,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1709,"_1570":1666,"_1544":1710,"_1572":1624,"_1574":1575,"_1546":461,"_1577":1711},[1704],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1705},{"_1555":1706},"

Organizing Products into Collections

Collections let you group products for easier browsing. Use them to create category pages, seasonal selections, sale sections, and curated product lists.

\n\n

Creating a Collection

Navigate to Collections in the sidebar and click Create Collection. Fill in the following:

Title — The collection name displayed on your storefront (e.g., \"Summer Sale\", \"New Arrivals\").
Description — A rich text description shown at the top of the collection page. Useful for SEO and providing context to customers.
Slug — The URL path for the collection page, auto-generated from the title.
Image — A featured image for the collection, shown on collection listing pages.

\n\n

Adding Products to a Collection

On the collection edit page, use the product picker to add products. Search by title, type, or tag to find products quickly. Products can belong to multiple collections — adding a product to \"Summer Sale\" does not remove it from \"T-Shirts\".

\n\n

Collection Display

Collections appear on your storefront at /collections/your-collection-slug. The collection page shows all associated products in a grid layout with pagination. Customers can use the collection page as a starting point for browsing related items.

\n\n

Sorting Products Within a Collection

Products within a collection can be sorted by:

Manual order (drag and drop)
Best selling
Price (low to high, high to low)
Date added (newest first, oldest first)
Title (A-Z, Z-A)

The default sort order is manual, allowing you to curate the exact product order your customers see.

\n\n

SEO for Collections

Each collection has its own meta title and description fields. If left blank, the collection title and description are used. Collection pages are automatically included in your sitemap for search engine discovery.

\n\n

Using Collections in Navigation

Add collections to your navigation menus to create category-based browsing. Go to Online Store → Navigation to add collection links to your header or footer menus.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.114662Z","f03dcb1e-0616-4e11-b2c4-8f735c3e10e1","Collections | Cartly Help Center","collections","2026-10-06T07:41:10.218308Z",{"_1551":1713,"_1561":1717,"_1554":1718,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1719,"_1570":1666,"_1544":1720,"_1572":1636,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1721,"_1577":1722},[1714],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1715},{"_1555":1716},"

Managing Your Inventory

Cartly provides multi-location inventory tracking to help you manage stock levels accurately and prevent overselling.

\n\n

Inventory Locations

A location represents a physical place where you store inventory — a warehouse, retail store, or fulfillment center. You can create multiple locations under Settings → Locations. Each location has a name and address.

\n\n

Setting Stock Levels

Stock is tracked per variant per location. On the product edit page, each variant shows its inventory level at each location. You can set quantities directly in the product editor or use the dedicated inventory management page for bulk updates.

\n\n

Inventory Tracking

When Track Inventory is enabled on a variant:

Stock is automatically decremented when an order is placed
Stock is restored if an order is cancelled before fulfillment
Stock is reserved during checkout to prevent overselling between the time a customer enters checkout and completes payment

\n\n

Low Stock Alerts

Set a low stock threshold on any variant. When inventory drops to or below this threshold, the variant appears in the Low Stock filter on the products page. This helps you identify items that need reordering before they sell out.

\n\n

Overselling Prevention

By default, Cartly prevents customers from purchasing variants that are out of stock. The \"Add to Cart\" button is disabled, and a \"Sold Out\" badge is displayed. If you want to allow backorders, enable Continue Selling When Out of Stock on the variant.

\n\n

Inventory Adjustments

You can adjust inventory quantities manually with a reason note. Common reasons include:

Received shipment from supplier
Inventory count correction
Damaged or lost goods
Returned items restocked

All inventory changes are logged with timestamps and the admin user who made the change, providing a complete audit trail.

\n\n

Multi-Location Fulfillment

When fulfilling an order, Cartly shows available stock at each location. You can fulfill from the location with the most stock, the nearest location to the customer, or split fulfillment across multiple locations.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.117059Z","af08d968-ca56-4ce2-85dd-7b30c6352f94","Inventory Management | Cartly Help Center","inventory-management","Inventory Management","2026-10-06T07:41:10.227331Z",{"_1551":1724,"_1561":1728,"_1554":1729,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1730,"_1570":1666,"_1544":1731,"_1572":1649,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1732,"_1577":1733},[1725],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1726},{"_1555":1727},"

Search and Discovery

Cartly uses Typesense — a fast, typo-tolerant search engine — to power instant product search on your storefront and in the admin panel.

\n\n

How Search Works

When you create or update a product, Cartly automatically syncs it to the Typesense search index within milliseconds. The index includes the product title, description, tags, type, vendor, and variant information. This means new products are searchable immediately after saving.

\n\n

Storefront Search

Your storefront includes a search bar that provides instant results as the customer types. Features include:

Typo tolerance — Finds products even when customers misspell words (e.g., \"snekers\" matches \"sneakers\")
Prefix search — Results appear as soon as the customer starts typing, before they finish the word
Relevance ranking — Results are sorted by relevance, with exact title matches ranked highest
Fast response — Search queries return results in under 50ms

\n\n

Admin Search

The admin panel uses the same Typesense index for product search. When you search in the Products section or use the command palette (Ctrl+K), you get the same instant, typo-tolerant results.

\n\n

Search Index Management

The search index is managed automatically. However, if you notice search results are out of sync, you can trigger a full reindex from the admin panel. This rebuilds the entire search index from your database, ensuring everything is up to date.

\n\n

Search Analytics

Cartly tracks what customers search for on your storefront. Use this data to:

Identify popular search terms and ensure matching products exist
Find search terms with zero results and add relevant products or synonyms
Understand what customers are looking for and adjust your catalog

\n\n

GraphQL Search

The storefront GraphQL API includes a products(query: \"...\") field that uses Typesense for full-text search. This allows headless frontends and mobile apps to leverage the same fast search capabilities.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.119828Z","241ac53b-7474-4971-8680-7baa5415fbe2","Product Search | Cartly Help Center","product-search","Product Search","2026-10-06T07:41:10.23521Z",{"_1551":1735,"_1561":1739,"_1554":1740,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1741,"_1570":1666,"_1544":1742,"_1572":1662,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1743,"_1577":1744},[1736],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1737},{"_1555":1738},"

Importing Products via CSV

Cartly supports bulk product import through CSV files, powered by Temporal workflows for reliable processing of large files.

\n\n

CSV Format

Your CSV file should include a header row with column names. Supported columns include:

title — Product title (required)
description — Product description (HTML supported)
product_type — Product type label
vendor — Brand or manufacturer
tags — Comma-separated tags
price — Price in decimal format (e.g., 29.99)
compare_at_price — Original price for sale items
sku — Stock keeping unit
barcode — UPC, EAN, or ISBN
inventory_quantity — Initial stock level
weight — Product weight
option1_name, option1_value — First option name and value
option2_name, option2_value — Second option name and value
option3_name, option3_value — Third option name and value
image_url — URL of the product image to download
status — active, draft, or archived

\n\n

Uploading Your CSV

Navigate to Products → Import and upload your CSV file. Cartly validates the file format and shows a preview of the first few rows. Review the column mapping to ensure each CSV column maps to the correct product field.

\n\n

Import Processing

When you start the import, Cartly creates a Temporal workflow that processes the CSV file in batches. This approach has several advantages:

Reliability — If the server restarts during import, processing resumes automatically from where it left off
Progress tracking — You can see real-time progress: how many rows have been processed, succeeded, and failed
Error handling — Failed rows are logged with specific error messages. You can download a CSV of failed rows, fix the issues, and re-import just those rows

\n\n

Import Profiles

Save your column mapping as an import profile for reuse. This is especially useful if you regularly import from the same supplier whose CSV format does not change. Select a saved profile before uploading to skip the mapping step.

\n\n

Large File Handling

Cartly handles CSV files with tens of thousands of rows. Files are processed in configurable batch sizes (default: 100 rows per batch) to balance speed and memory usage. A 10,000-row file typically completes in under two minutes.

\n\n

Variant Handling in CSV

For products with variants, include one row per variant. Rows with the same title are grouped into a single product. The first row for each title defines the base product fields; subsequent rows with the same title add variants with their specific option values, prices, and SKUs.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.124793Z","51b91627-8a8e-4a1b-b02a-993384de52b4","Bulk Product Import | Cartly Help Center","bulk-import","Bulk Product Import","2026-10-06T07:41:10.242508Z",{"_1551":1746,"_1561":1750,"_1554":1751,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1752,"_1570":1666,"_1544":1753,"_1572":1754,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1755,"_1577":1756},[1747],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1748},{"_1555":1749},"

The Options Builder

The Options Builder is the fastest way to create product variants. Instead of adding variants one at a time, you define your product's options and Cartly automatically generates every combination as a variant.

\n\n

Adding Options and Values

On the product edit page, open the Options section:

Click Add Option and name it (e.g., \"Color\", \"Size\", \"Material\"). Option names are fully flexible — including multilingual names for stores selling in multiple languages.
Add values for the option as chips — type a value and press Enter, or paste a comma-separated list. For example, a \"Color\" option might have the values Red, Blue, Green.
Repeat for up to 3 options per product.

As soon as you have at least one option with values, Cartly generates the full variant matrix — the cartesian product of every option's values. Two options with 3 and 2 values each produce 6 variants; three options with 3, 2, and 2 values produce 12 variants.

\n\n

Editing the Variant Grid

Every generated variant appears as a row in a single grid below the Options section. For each variant you can edit:

Price — the selling price for this specific combination
SKU — a unique stock keeping unit for this variant
Barcode — UPC, EAN, or ISBN for this variant
Cost — your cost of goods for this variant (see Tracking Product Cost (COGS))

Changes to the grid are saved together with the rest of the product — there is no separate save step per variant.

\n\n

Stock Is Managed in the Inventory Block

The variants grid does not edit stock. Stock levels are tracked per location in the Inventory block further down the product page, exactly as with single-variant products. This means saving your product's price, SKU, or option changes never disturbs your existing location stock levels.

\n\n

Removing an Option Value

If you remove a value from an option (for example, discontinuing the \"Extra Small\" size), Cartly removes exactly the variants that were generated from that value. Variants built from the remaining option values are left untouched — their price, SKU, barcode, and cost are preserved.

\n\n

Storefront Behavior

On the storefront, customers pick a value for each option and Cartly resolves the matching variant automatically. Option pickers work correctly no matter how you named your options, and combinations that are out of stock are shown accurately so customers do not add unavailable combinations to their cart.

","2026-07-06T19:11:51.744779Z","25eaa94d-d5c7-4d3a-833d-ccdebac14888","Creating Product Variants with Options | Cartly Help Center","creating-product-variants-with-options",80,"Creating Product Variants with Options","2026-10-06T07:41:10.249259Z",{"_1551":1758,"_1561":1762,"_1554":1763,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1764,"_1570":1666,"_1544":1765,"_1572":1766,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1767,"_1577":1768},[1759],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1760},{"_1555":1761},"

Cost of Goods Sold, Per Variant

Every product variant has a Cost field for recording your cost of goods sold (COGS) — what you paid to acquire or produce the item. Cost is separate from Price and Compare-at Price and is never shown to customers on the storefront.

\n\n

Entering Cost Manually

Open a product, and in the variants grid enter a Cost value alongside Price, SKU, and Barcode for each variant. For single-variant products, Cost appears directly in the Pricing section of the product form.

\n\n

Filling Cost Automatically from an Integration

If your store is connected to an external ERP or inventory-management system through a catalog integration, Cost can be populated automatically as part of your regular catalog sync. Your integration's price lists are mapped to Cartly's Price, Compare-at price, and Cost fields, so cost data stays current without manual entry. See Connecting an External ERP or Inventory System for setup details.

\n\n

Why Track Cost

Recording cost per variant is the foundation for margin and profit reporting — knowing how much you actually earn on each sale after accounting for what the item cost you, as distinct from just the revenue shown by the selling price.

\n\n

Important Notice

Cost reflects the variant's current value at any given time. If you update a variant's cost, the new value applies going forward — keep this in mind when reviewing cost-based reports that span a period where your costs changed.

","2026-07-06T19:11:51.748646Z","bb44725f-0f2c-49cb-987f-643830ff2a18","Tracking Product Cost (COGS) | Cartly Help Center","tracking-product-cost-cogs",90,"Tracking Product Cost (COGS)","2026-10-06T07:41:10.252925Z",{"_1551":1770,"_1561":1774,"_1554":1775,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1776,"_1568":1777,"_1570":1666,"_1544":1778,"_1572":1779,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1780,"_1577":1781},[1771],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1772},{"_1555":1773},"

Overview

The variant editor helps you build and maintain product variants — combinations of options like Size and Color — quickly, even for products with many variants.

Adding Options and Values

Open a product and go to the Options section
Add an option (for example, Size) and its values (for example, Small, Medium, Large)
Cartly generates a variant for every combination of your option values automatically

Reordering Options and Values

Drag an option's handle to change the order options appear in on the product page, or drag a value chip within an option to reorder its values — useful for putting sizes in the order shoppers expect (Small before Large) rather than the order they were typed.

Renaming a Value in Place

Double-click a value chip (or press Enter while it's focused) to rename it. Renaming updates every variant that uses that value while keeping each variant's id, price, SKU, and inventory intact — nothing is recreated or reset.

Bulk-Editing Price and SKU

When a product has more than one variant, an Apply to all row appears above the variant list:

Set price on all — enter a price and click Apply to set it on every variant at once
SKU prefix — enter a prefix and click Apply to prepend it to every variant's SKU, while keeping each SKU unique

Per-Variant Images

Each variant has its own image column, so a shopper who picks a specific color sees that color's photo rather than the product's default image.

ASCII-Only SKUs

Turn on ASCII-only SKU (scanner-safe) before generating variants to keep autogenerated SKUs limited to plain letters, numbers, and hyphens — useful if you print barcodes or use handheld scanners that don't handle accented characters or symbols well.

","2026-08-29T11:48:19.522333Z","710580e0-a263-4d2c-b708-cc6c15a00e20","Bulk-edit price and SKU prefix, drag to reorder options, rename values in place, and add per-variant images.","Building product variants | Cartly Help Center","building-product-variants",100,"Building product variants","2026-10-06T07:41:11.258114Z",{"_1544":1783,"_1546":1784,"_1548":1785},"orders-fulfillment","Orders & Fulfillment",[1786,1797,1808,1819,1830,1841,1852,1864,1876,1888],{"_1551":1787,"_1561":1791,"_1554":1792,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1793,"_1570":1783,"_1544":1794,"_1572":1573,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1795,"_1577":1796},[1788],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1789},{"_1555":1790},"

Managing Your Orders

The Orders page is your central hub for tracking and managing all customer purchases.

\n\n

Order List

Navigate to Orders in the sidebar to see all orders. Each row shows the order number, date, customer name, payment status, fulfillment status, and total amount. Orders are sorted by most recent by default.

\n\n

Filtering Orders

Use the filter bar to narrow down your order list:

Status — Filter by payment status (paid, pending, refunded) or fulfillment status (unfulfilled, partially fulfilled, fulfilled)
Date range — View orders from a specific time period
Customer — Search by customer name or email
Amount — Filter by order total range

\n\n

Order Detail View

Click any order to open its detail page. The detail page is organized into sections:

Line items — Each product, variant, quantity, unit price, and line total. Click a product to jump to its edit page.
Customer info — Shipping address, billing address, email, and phone. Link to the customer profile.
Payment — Stripe payment details, transaction ID, and refund history.
Fulfillment — Fulfillment status, tracking numbers, and shipping carrier.
Timeline — A complete chronological history of every event: order placed, payment captured, items fulfilled, notes added.

\n\n

Order Notes

Add internal notes to any order. Notes are visible only to your admin team and are useful for tracking special requests, shipping instructions, or issues. Each note shows who wrote it and when.

\n\n

Exporting Orders

Click the Export button to download your filtered order list as a CSV file. The export includes all order fields: number, date, customer details, line items, totals, payment status, and fulfillment status. Use this for accounting, reporting, or importing into external systems.

\n\n

Order Search

Use the search bar at the top of the orders page to find specific orders by order number, customer name, or email address. The search is instant and works across all order fields.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.130288Z","4e8bd6e8-853e-418e-98eb-366e59cc7a03","Viewing Orders | Cartly Help Center","viewing-orders","Viewing Orders","2026-10-06T07:41:10.266778Z",{"_1551":1798,"_1561":1802,"_1554":1803,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1804,"_1570":1783,"_1544":1805,"_1572":1600,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1806,"_1577":1807},[1799],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1800},{"_1555":1801},"

Understanding Order Statuses

Every order in Cartly has two independent status indicators: payment status and fulfillment status. Together, they describe the complete lifecycle of an order.

\n\n

Payment Statuses

Pending — The order has been created but payment has not been captured. This typically occurs during the brief window between checkout initiation and payment processing.
Paid — Payment has been successfully captured via Stripe. The funds are in your account (or pending payout according to your Stripe schedule).
Partially Refunded — A portion of the order total has been refunded. The refunded amount is shown on the order detail page.
Refunded — The full order amount has been refunded to the customer.
Voided — The payment authorization was cancelled before capture. No money changed hands.

\n\n

Fulfillment Statuses

Unfulfilled — No items have been shipped yet. This is the initial state for all new orders.
Partially Fulfilled — Some items have been shipped, but not all. This occurs when you split fulfillment across multiple shipments.
Fulfilled — All items have been shipped. Tracking information has been added.

\n\n

Order Lifecycle

A typical order follows this path:

Customer completes checkout → Order created (Pending / Unfulfilled)
Payment captured → (Paid / Unfulfilled)
Items shipped → (Paid / Fulfilled)

Orders remain in your system permanently and cannot be deleted, only archived. This ensures a complete audit trail for accounting and compliance.

\n\n

Zero Lost Orders

Cartly's checkout workflow uses the Saga pattern to ensure that once a payment is authorized, an order record is always created. Even if the database experiences a transient failure, Temporal retries the order creation activity until it succeeds. The payment and order creation are linked — you will never have a situation where a customer is charged but no order appears in your admin panel.

\n\n

Order Events

Every status change is recorded as an order event in the timeline. Events include timestamps, the previous and new status, and the user or system that triggered the change. This provides a complete audit trail for every order.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.13298Z","15221722-2a19-4c5e-b7e3-f5fb544ae518","Order Statuses | Cartly Help Center","order-statuses","Order Statuses","2026-10-06T07:41:10.275994Z",{"_1551":1809,"_1561":1813,"_1554":1814,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1815,"_1570":1783,"_1544":1816,"_1572":1612,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1817,"_1577":1818},[1810],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1811},{"_1555":1812},"

Fulfilling Orders

Fulfillment is the process of shipping ordered items to your customer. Cartly supports full and partial fulfillment with tracking integration.

\n\n

Creating a Fulfillment

Open an unfulfilled order and click the Fulfill button. You will see a list of all unfulfilled line items with their quantities. For each item, confirm the quantity to fulfill (you can reduce it for partial fulfillment).

\n\n

Adding Tracking Information

When creating a fulfillment, you can add:

Tracking number — The shipment tracking code from your carrier
Carrier — Select from common carriers (USPS, UPS, FedEx, DHL) or enter a custom carrier name
Tracking URL — A direct link to the tracking page (auto-generated for known carriers)

The customer receives a shipping confirmation email with the tracking information automatically.

\n\n

Partial Fulfillment

If you cannot ship all items at once, fulfill only the available items. The order status changes to Partially Fulfilled. You can create additional fulfillments later for the remaining items. Each fulfillment can have its own tracking number and carrier.

\n\n

Multi-Location Fulfillment

If you have inventory at multiple locations, Cartly shows the available stock at each location when you create a fulfillment. You can choose which location to fulfill from, or split items across locations. Each location's inventory is decremented accordingly.

\n\n

Fulfillment Timeline

Every fulfillment action is recorded in the order timeline:

Fulfillment created (with items and quantities)
Tracking information added or updated
Customer notification sent

\n\n

Cancelling a Fulfillment

If a shipment needs to be cancelled (e.g., wrong items packed), you can cancel the fulfillment. This restores the items to unfulfilled status and optionally restocks the inventory. The customer is not notified of fulfillment cancellations — only of new fulfillments.

\n\n

Packing Slips

Generate packing slips from the order detail page. The packing slip includes the order number, shipping address, and a list of items with quantities. You can print packing slips individually or in bulk from the orders list.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.138768Z","760cc883-075e-4f76-b74d-04e463019382","Fulfillment | Cartly Help Center","fulfillment","Fulfillment","2026-10-06T07:41:10.284589Z",{"_1551":1820,"_1561":1824,"_1554":1825,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1826,"_1570":1783,"_1544":1827,"_1572":1624,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1828,"_1577":1829},[1821],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1822},{"_1555":1823},"

Processing Returns and Refunds

Cartly provides a streamlined process for handling return requests and issuing refunds through Stripe.

\n\n

Return Requests

Customers can submit return requests from their account page on your storefront. Each return request includes the items to return, the reason for the return, and optional notes. You can also create return requests manually from the admin panel.

\n\n

Reviewing Returns

Pending return requests appear in the Orders → Returns section. Review each request and decide whether to approve or decline it. When reviewing, consider:

Is the return within your return policy window?
Is the reason valid?
Has the customer provided photos of the issue (if applicable)?

\n\n

Issuing Refunds

Once a return is approved (or if you need to refund without a return), navigate to the order detail page and click Refund. You can issue:

Full refund — Refunds the entire order amount including shipping
Partial refund — Refund specific line items or a custom amount
Shipping refund — Refund only the shipping cost

\n\n

Stripe Refund Processing

Refunds are processed through Stripe and typically appear on the customer's statement within 5-10 business days, depending on their bank. Cartly creates a Stripe Refund object linked to the original PaymentIntent, ensuring a clear audit trail in both systems.

\n\n

Refunds the Provider Did Not Confirm

If the payment provider gives no answer to a refund, the order shows a warning with Confirm refund and Reject. See Confirming or rejecting an unconfirmed refund.

\n\n

Restocking

When processing a refund, you can choose whether to restock the returned items. If restocked, the inventory quantities are increased at the specified location. If the items are damaged and cannot be resold, leave the restock option unchecked.

\n\n

Refund History

All refunds are recorded in the order timeline with the amount, reason, and admin who processed them. The order payment status updates automatically: Partially Refunded if some amount remains, or Refunded if the full amount has been returned.

\n\n

Return Notifications

Customers receive email notifications when their return request is approved or declined, and again when the refund is processed. These emails are customizable in Settings → Email Templates.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.143882Z","638480c4-500e-4998-8c8b-7348881935cb","Returns & Refunds | Cartly Help Center","returns-refunds","Returns & Refunds","2026-10-07T12:32:11.513995Z",{"_1551":1831,"_1561":1835,"_1554":1836,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1837,"_1570":1783,"_1544":1838,"_1572":1636,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1839,"_1577":1840},[1832],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1833},{"_1555":1834},"

Creating Orders Manually

Manual orders allow you to create orders on behalf of customers for phone orders, in-person sales, or custom arrangements.

\n\n

When to Use Manual Orders

A customer calls in and wants to place an order over the phone
You sold items at a trade show or pop-up shop
A customer needs a custom product configuration not available on the storefront
Wholesale or B2B orders that go through a different sales channel

\n\n

Creating a Manual Order

Navigate to Orders and click Create Order. The manual order form includes:

Add products — Search for products and add them to the order. Adjust quantities as needed. You can also add custom line items with a title and price for items not in your catalog.
Set customer — Search for an existing customer or create a new one inline. The customer's saved addresses are available for selection.
Shipping address — Select from the customer's saved addresses or enter a new one.
Shipping method — Choose a shipping rate or mark as local pickup.
Apply discount — Add a discount code or a manual percentage/amount discount.
Add notes — Internal notes about the order.

\n\n

Payment Options

For manual orders, you have several payment options:

Mark as paid — If you have already collected payment (cash, check, bank transfer), mark the order as paid immediately.
Send invoice — Email the customer a payment link. They can complete payment online using their credit card via Stripe.
Mark as pending — Create the order without payment and collect later.

\n\n

Inventory Impact

Manual orders decrement inventory just like storefront orders. When you add products to a manual order and save it, the stock quantities are reduced. If you cancel the order, you can choose to restock the items.

\n\n

Order Number

Manual orders receive the next sequential order number, just like storefront orders. They appear in the same order list and are treated identically for fulfillment, refunds, and reporting.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.149324Z","0f84d805-ae0f-406a-8776-74f31897d0cf","Manual Orders | Cartly Help Center","manual-orders","Manual Orders","2026-10-06T07:41:10.295719Z",{"_1551":1842,"_1561":1846,"_1554":1847,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1848,"_1570":1783,"_1544":1849,"_1572":1649,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1850,"_1577":1851},[1843],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1844},{"_1555":1845},"

Overview

Cartly's self-serve RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization) feature lets customers request returns from their account page. You review and approve or reject each request from the admin panel.

How it works

Customer goes to My Account → Orders, opens an order, and clicks \"Request Return\".
Customer selects the item(s), quantity, and reason.
You receive a return request in Admin → Orders → Returns.
Approve or reject with an optional message.
On approval, a refund is automatically triggered and the customer is notified.

Return window

The default return window is 30 days from the order date. To change this, go to Admin → Settings → Returns.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.318951Z","64281eee-bd35-4df2-a5fb-3ad9223e140a","Accepting Customer Return Requests | Cartly Help Center","customer-returns-rma","Accepting Customer Return Requests","2026-10-06T07:41:10.815862Z",{"_1551":1853,"_1561":1857,"_1554":1858,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1859,"_1568":1860,"_1570":1783,"_1544":1861,"_1572":1662,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1862,"_1577":1863},[1854],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1855},{"_1555":1856},"

Overview

Once an order is paid, you can fulfill it by entering a tracking number, printing a packing slip, or purchasing a shipping label directly from your Cartly admin.

\n\n

Manual Fulfillment

Open the order from Admin → Orders
Click Fulfill Items
Select which items to fulfill (default: all unfulfilled items)
Enter the Tracking Number — the carrier field auto-completes as you type (e.g. start typing \"FedEx\" or \"DHL\")
Click Fulfill

Cartly sends a shipment confirmation email to the customer with the tracking number. The order fulfillment status updates to Fulfilled or Partially Fulfilled depending on which items were marked.

\n\n

Packing Slips

Print a packing slip to include in the shipment package.

Open an order
Click the Print menu → Packing Slip
A printable PDF view opens in a new tab — use your browser's print dialog

The packing slip includes order number, customer details, shipping address, line items with quantities, and your store name and logo.

\n\n

Pick Lists

A pick list is useful for warehouse picking when fulfilling multiple orders at once.

Go to Admin → Orders and select multiple unfulfilled orders using the checkboxes
Click Actions → Print Pick List
A consolidated pick list PDF opens listing all SKUs and quantities across the selected orders

\n\n

Shipping Labels via Integrations

If you have a carrier integration installed (e.g. Shippo), you can purchase a label without leaving the admin.

Open a paid, unfulfilled order
Click Buy Shipping Label
Select the carrier rate from the list of available options fetched from your connector
Confirm — the label is purchased and the PDF URL is stored on the fulfillment record
Click Download Label to print

To enable carrier integrations, go to Admin → Apps → Integrations and connect your shipping provider.

\n\n

Notes

Partial fulfillments are supported — fulfill line items in multiple shipments with separate tracking numbers
All fulfillment events appear in the order timeline for a full audit trail

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.345948Z","2134b73c-59a1-414d-adf5-d897c3d490c2","Fulfill orders manually, print packing slips and pick lists, and purchase shipping labels via connected carriers.","Fulfillment & Shipping Labels | Cartly Help Center","fulfillment-shipping","Fulfillment, Packing Slips & Shipping Labels","2026-10-06T07:41:10.861872Z",{"_1551":1865,"_1561":1869,"_1554":1870,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1871,"_1568":1872,"_1570":1783,"_1544":1873,"_1572":1754,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1874,"_1577":1875},[1866],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1867},{"_1555":1868},"

Search Across Every Order Field

The Orders list has a single global search box that matches across email, order number, customer name, phone number, and tracking number. Type any part of what you are looking for and Cartly finds the matching orders — you no longer need to know which field a value lives in.

\n\n

Reading the List at a Glance

Each row in the Orders list now shows the customer's name and a preview of the items ordered, so you can identify an order without opening it. Payment and delivery status badges make it immediately clear which orders are paid, unpaid, shipped, or delivered.

\n\n

Quick Actions

Click anywhere on an order row to open it, or use the quick-actions menu on the row to jump straight to a common action, such as fulfilling the order or viewing its details, without leaving the list.

\n\n

Customizing Columns

Choose which columns appear in your Orders list from the column settings, so the table shows exactly the information your team relies on most — whether that is tags, tracking numbers, or payment method.

\n\n

A Richer Order Detail Page

Opening an order now shows a full tax breakdown, the shipping method used, any shipping labels, item weight and barcode, the discount type applied, and a dedicated card for the billing address — all in one place.

","2026-07-13T17:25:48.399056Z","65e03695-0404-4eba-84bd-619ea2b111c8","Search your orders by email, order number, customer name, phone, or tracking number, and use badges, quick actions, and custom columns to work faster.","Finding orders fast with global search | Cartly Help Center","find-orders-with-global-search","Finding orders fast with global search","2026-10-06T07:41:11.169066Z",{"_1551":1877,"_1561":1881,"_1554":1882,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1883,"_1568":1884,"_1570":1783,"_1544":1885,"_1572":1766,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1886,"_1577":1887},[1878],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1879},{"_1555":1880},"

Editing an Order That Is Already Paid

You can edit an order after the customer has paid, for example to add or remove an item. Editing recalculates the total, but it never moves money: the customer's card is not charged again and nothing is refunded. Instead, the order page shows what is owed next to the order status.

Balance due: the new total is higher than what the customer paid. The order is marked Partially paid until the balance is covered.
Refund due: the new total is lower than what the customer paid.

\n\n

Recording the Balance

If the customer pays the difference outside the checkout, for example in cash, by bank transfer or in person, record it on the order:

Open the order and click Collect balance. The button shows on orders that are Partially paid.
Enter the amount you collected. It cannot be more than the balance due.
Add a reference note if you want one, such as a transfer number. It is kept in the order's audit trail.
Click Record payment.

This only records a payment you already received. The card is not charged. When the whole balance is recorded, the Balance due badge disappears and the order is no longer Partially paid; a smaller amount lowers the balance due. Because the order was already paid once, recording the balance does not send the order-paid notifications or webhooks again.

Only the store owner or an admin can record a payment. Staff see the button disabled.

\n\n

Returning a Refund Due

Refund due shows the amount the customer overpaid after an edit lowered the total. Use Refund on the order page to return it as described in Returns & Refunds. The badge goes away once the refunded amount covers it.

","2026-10-07T12:32:11.553987Z","69d1cb3f-007a-44e2-9508-1ee37eef4c0c","After you edit a paid order, see the balance due or refund due, and record a payment you collected outside the checkout with Collect balance.","Balance Due on an Edited Order | Cartly Help Center","collecting-the-balance-on-an-edited-order","Collecting the balance on an edited order","2026-10-07T12:32:11.553988Z",{"_1551":1889,"_1561":1893,"_1554":1894,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1895,"_1568":1896,"_1570":1783,"_1544":1897,"_1572":1779,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1898,"_1577":1893},[1890],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1891},{"_1555":1892},"

What an Unconfirmed Refund Is

When you refund an order, Cartly asks the payment provider to return the money. Sometimes the provider does not answer in time, and Cartly cannot tell whether the refund went through. The order then counts the amount as refunded and shows a warning: A refund was not confirmed by the payment provider.

Until you decide, the follow-ups of the refund wait: the email to the customer, releasing stock, taking back loyalty points, returning gift card or store credit on a full refund, and the refund events sent to webhooks.

\n\n

What to Do

Open the transaction in your payment provider's dashboard and look for the refund.
If the refund is there, click Confirm refund. You can paste the refund ID from the provider's dashboard, which is optional. Cartly then sends the customer email and runs the other follow-ups once.
If the provider shows no refund at all, click Reject, add a note if you like, and confirm. The amount is given back, so you can refund it again.

Do not refund the order by hand while the provider shows the refund as pending or held for review. Wait until the provider settles it, then confirm or reject.

\n\n

Who Can Do This

Only the store owner or an admin can confirm or reject a refund. If two-step verification is turned on for your account, Cartly asks for a current code before it goes through.

\n\n

","2026-10-07T12:32:11.554969Z","96d3b608-fa68-48bd-8001-37b8ff163cab","When the payment provider gives no answer to a refund, the order shows it with Confirm refund and Reject. Check your provider dashboard, then decide.","Unconfirmed Refunds | Cartly Help Center","confirming-or-rejecting-an-unconfirmed-refund","Confirming or rejecting an unconfirmed refund",{"_1544":1900,"_1546":1901,"_1548":1902},"customers","Customers",[1903,1914,1925,1936,1947],{"_1551":1904,"_1561":1908,"_1554":1909,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1910,"_1570":1900,"_1544":1911,"_1572":1573,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1912,"_1577":1913},[1905],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1906},{"_1555":1907},"

Managing Your Customers

The Customers section gives you a complete view of everyone who has purchased from or registered at your store.

\n\n

Customer List

Navigate to Customers in the sidebar to see all registered customers. The list shows each customer's name, email, total orders, total spent, and registration date. Use the search bar to find customers by name or email.

\n\n

Customer Profile

Click a customer to view their full profile. The profile page includes:

Contact information — Name, email, phone number
Order history — All orders placed by this customer with direct links to each order
Total spent — Lifetime spend amount across all orders
Addresses — Saved shipping and billing addresses
Groups — Customer groups this person belongs to
Notes — Internal notes added by your team
Wishlist — Products the customer has saved to their wishlist

\n\n

Adding Customers Manually

Click Add Customer to create a customer record manually. Enter their name, email, and optionally a phone number and address. Manually added customers can later register an account on your storefront using the same email.

\n\n

Customer Search and Filtering

Beyond basic name and email search, you can filter customers by:

Number of orders (e.g., more than 5 orders)
Total spent (e.g., spent over $100)
Registration date range
Customer group membership

\n\n

Customer Notes

Add notes to any customer profile. Notes are visible only to your admin team. Use them to record VIP status, special preferences, communication history, or any other relevant information.

\n\n

Exporting Customers

Export your customer list as a CSV file for email marketing platforms, analytics, or backup. The export includes all customer fields and can be filtered before exporting.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.15614Z","8d90e715-298e-47ad-b361-9854279da3da","Customer Management | Cartly Help Center","customer-management","Customer Management","2026-10-06T07:41:10.302401Z",{"_1551":1915,"_1561":1919,"_1554":1920,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1921,"_1570":1900,"_1544":1922,"_1572":1600,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1923,"_1577":1924},[1916],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1917},{"_1555":1918},"

Customer Accounts on Your Storefront

Cartly provides a complete customer account system that lets your buyers register, log in, and manage their information.

\n\n

Registration

Customers can register through the registration page on your storefront. The registration form requires a name, email, and password. After registration, a verification email is sent to confirm the email address. Customers must verify their email before they can complete a checkout.

\n\n

Login and Sessions

Customer sessions are managed through secure HTTP-only cookies stored in Redis. When a customer logs in, a session is created that persists until they log out or the session expires (configurable, default 30 days). Sessions are server-side for security — the cookie contains only a session ID, not user data.

\n\n

Two-Factor Authentication

Customers can enable two-factor authentication (2FA) using a TOTP authenticator app. When 2FA is enabled, logging in requires both the password and a time-based code from their authenticator. This provides an additional layer of security for customer accounts.

\n\n

Account Dashboard

Once logged in, customers can access their account page which includes:

Order history — View all past orders with status and tracking information
Addresses — Add, edit, and delete saved shipping addresses. The default address is pre-filled during checkout.
Wishlist — View and manage saved products. Add items to cart directly from the wishlist.
Account settings — Update name, email, and password

\n\n

Password Reset

Customers who forget their password can request a reset link. The link is sent to their registered email and expires after one hour. Clicking the link opens a form to set a new password.

\n\n

Guest Checkout

Customers are not required to create an account to make a purchase. Guest checkout collects only the necessary information (email, shipping address, payment). After a guest purchase, the customer can optionally create an account using the same email, which links their guest order to the new account.

\n\n

Account Security

Cartly protects customer accounts with:

Bcrypt password hashing
Rate-limited login attempts
Email verification requirement
Secure session management via Redis
Optional two-factor authentication

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.159859Z","dbd120e6-fe3d-4e13-b86a-14683142def4","Customer Accounts | Cartly Help Center","customer-accounts","Customer Accounts","2026-10-06T07:41:10.308358Z",{"_1551":1926,"_1561":1930,"_1554":1931,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1932,"_1570":1900,"_1544":1933,"_1572":1612,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1934,"_1577":1935},[1927],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1928},{"_1555":1929},"

Working with Customer Groups

Customer groups let you give a set of customers their own discount or tax treatment, such as wholesale buyers, VIP members or staff.

\n\n

Groups Belong to One Store

A customer group belongs to the store that created it. A customer who shops at several Cartly stores can be in a different group at each one, and a group's discount or tax exemption applies only in the store that owns it. Putting a customer in your \"Wholesale\" group changes nothing for that customer in other stores.

In your store, a customer is in one group at a time, or in none.

\n\n

Creating a Group

Open Groups in the Sales section of the admin sidebar and click New Group. Give the group a name (for example \"Wholesale\" or \"VIP\") and choose:

Discount type: none, a percentage off, or a fixed amount off. The discount applies to the orders of members of this group.
Tax exempt: no tax is applied to the orders of members of this group.

Customers do not see their group.

\n\n

Assigning Customers to a Group

From the customer profile: open the customer, find Customer Group, pick a group and save. Pick No group to remove the customer from their group.
In bulk: on the customer list, select up to 100 customers and use the bulk action to assign them to a group. Only customers who have ordered in your store can be assigned this way; guest accounts cannot.

Assigning a customer to a new group replaces the previous group in your store. The change applies on the customer's next cart or checkout.

\n\n

Removing a Group Discount

Setting a customer to No group, or changing the group's discount type to none, takes the group discount off from their next checkout.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.165313Z","43b4497a-6f91-4671-aa20-df9fe244d66c","Customer Groups | Cartly Help Center","customer-groups","Customer Groups","2026-10-07T12:32:11.526806Z",{"_1551":1937,"_1561":1941,"_1554":1942,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1943,"_1570":1900,"_1544":1944,"_1572":1662,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1945,"_1577":1946},[1938],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1939},{"_1555":1940},"

Overview

Cartly's B2B module lets you create company accounts with multiple locations, invite buyers with role-based access, and connect enterprise identity providers via SSO.

Enable B2B for your shop

Go to Admin → Settings → B2B and toggle \"Enable B2B accounts\".

Create a company

Go to Admin → B2B → Companies and click \"Add company\".
Fill in company name, Tax ID (optional), credit limit, and payment terms.
Save.

Add locations

Each company can have multiple locations (offices, warehouses). Set a budget limit per location and a budget period (monthly/quarterly/yearly). Budgets reset automatically.

Invite members

From the company page, click \"Add member\". Assign a role: Admin (full access), Buyer (can place orders), or Viewer (read-only).

Configure SSO

For enterprise clients, enable OIDC SSO so buyers log in via their corporate identity provider (Google Workspace, Azure AD, Okta). Go to the company page → SSO tab, paste the OIDC discovery URL and credentials. Members who log in via SSO are automatically linked to the company.

Passwordless login

Buyers can also log in via one-time code (email or SMS) or a magic link, without a password.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.315793Z","c8ea816f-cd41-42cd-ab0b-8f6e9468c7a0","Setting up B2B Customer Accounts | Cartly Help Center","customer-portal-b2b","Setting up B2B Customer Accounts","2026-10-06T07:41:10.804732Z",{"_1551":1948,"_1561":1952,"_1554":1953,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1954,"_1568":1955,"_1570":1900,"_1544":1956,"_1572":1754,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1957,"_1577":1958},[1949],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1950},{"_1555":1951},"

What Is Business SSO?

Business single sign-on lets the buyers at a B2B company sign in to your storefront through your own OpenID Connect (OIDC) identity provider, instead of creating a separate Cartly password. The whole team shares one login, and you manage access from your identity provider — add or remove a teammate there and their storefront access follows.

Setting Up SSO for a Company

Go to Admin → Companies and open the company
On the Details tab, set the company's Company ID (lowercase, url-safe) — buyers use this to sign in
Switch to the SSO tab and enter your identity provider's Issuer URL, Client ID, and Client Secret
Toggle Enable SSO for this company on and save

Registering the Callback with Your Identity Provider

Add the following URL to your identity provider's allowed redirect URLs before enabling SSO:

https://cartly.pro/storefront/v1/sso/callback

How Buyers Sign In

On the storefront login page, the buyer clicks Sign in with SSO
They enter their company's Company ID
They are redirected to your identity provider to authenticate, then returned to your storefront signed in

Notes

SSO is configured per company — different companies can use different identity providers, or none at all
Turning SSO off does not delete your configuration; you can re-enable it later without re-entering your credentials
Saving the SSO tab without a new Client Secret keeps the existing one unchanged

","2026-08-29T11:48:19.517542Z","bb312053-5136-4287-9b46-e058dd3517bd","Let B2B customers sign in through your company's OpenID Connect identity provider, with one login managed by you.","Single sign-on for business customers | Cartly Help Center","single-sign-on-for-business-customers","Single sign-on for business customers","2026-10-06T07:41:11.251351Z",{"_1544":1960,"_1546":1961,"_1548":1962},"online-store","Online Store",[1963,1974,1985,1997,2009,2021,2032,2043,2055,2067,2079,2091,2103,2115,2126,2137,2148,2159,2170,2181,2194,2207,2220,2233,2246,2259,2272],{"_1551":1964,"_1561":1968,"_1554":1969,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1970,"_1570":1960,"_1544":1971,"_1572":1573,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1972,"_1577":1973},[1965],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1966},{"_1555":1967},"

Customizing Your Store Theme

Cartly's theme system lets you control the look and feel of your storefront without writing code. The ThemeConfig entity stores all visual settings that are applied globally.

\n\n

Accessing Theme Settings

Navigate to Online Store → Theme in the admin sidebar. The theme editor opens with a live preview of your storefront alongside the settings panel.

\n\n

Color Palette

Configure your store's color scheme with the following options:

Primary color — Used for buttons, links, and accents. Choose a color that represents your brand.
Secondary color — Used for secondary buttons and less prominent elements.
Background color — The main page background color.
Text color — The default text color for body content.
Header background — The background color of your store header.
Footer background — The background color of the footer section.

\n\n

Typography

Select fonts for headings and body text. Cartly includes a curated set of web fonts optimized for performance. Changes apply instantly in the preview panel. You can set font sizes, weights, and line heights for different text elements.

\n\n

Header Configuration

The header settings control your store's top navigation bar:

Logo — Upload your store logo. Supported formats: PNG, SVG, JPEG. Recommended size: 200x60 pixels.
Layout — Choose between centered or left-aligned logo with navigation.
Sticky header — Keep the header visible as customers scroll.
Announcement bar — Show a dismissible banner above the header for promotions or notices.

\n\n

Footer Configuration

Customize the footer with:

Column layout (1-4 columns)
Social media links
Newsletter signup form
Copyright text
Payment method icons

\n\n

Saving and Publishing

All changes are previewed in real time. Click Save to apply your changes to the live storefront. There is no separate publish step — saved changes are immediately visible to your customers.

\n\n

Theme Presets

Cartly includes several pre-configured theme presets for different store styles: Minimal, Bold, Classic, and Modern. Select a preset to apply its color palette and typography settings, then customize further to match your brand.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.169107Z","05a59914-a4ae-441a-8e54-8557688de0d2","Theme Customization | Cartly Help Center","theme-customization","Theme Customization","2026-10-06T07:41:10.32434Z",{"_1551":1975,"_1561":1979,"_1554":1980,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1981,"_1570":1960,"_1544":1982,"_1572":1600,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1983,"_1577":1984},[1976],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1977},{"_1555":1978},"

Building Pages with the Visual Editor

Cartly's visual editor lets you create custom pages using a drag-and-drop interface. Build landing pages, about pages, and promotional content without writing code.

\n\n

Opening the Editor

Navigate to Online Store → Pages and create a new page or edit an existing one. Click Edit with Visual Editor to open the drag-and-drop interface. The editor shows a live preview of your page alongside the block palette.

\n\n

Adding Sections

The left panel shows available section types. Click or drag a section to add it to your page. Available sections include:

Hero Banner — Full-width image or color background with title, subtitle, and call-to-action buttons
Rich Text — Formatted text content with headings, paragraphs, lists, and links
Image with Text — Side-by-side layout with an image and text content
Feature Grid — Grid of feature cards with icons, titles, and descriptions
Product Grid — Display selected products or a collection in a grid layout
Testimonials — Customer quotes with attribution
Video — Embed YouTube or Vimeo videos
FAQ — Expandable accordion-style questions and answers
Newsletter Signup — Email collection form
Custom HTML — Raw HTML for advanced customization

\n\n

Editing Section Content

Click any section in the preview to select it. The right panel shows the section's settings where you can edit text, change images, adjust colors, and configure layout options. Each section type has settings specific to its content.

\n\n

Reordering Sections

Drag sections up or down in the page to reorder them. The preview updates in real time as you move sections around. This makes it easy to experiment with different page layouts.

\n\n

Section Settings

Each section has common settings:

Background — Color, image, or gradient
Padding — Top and bottom spacing
Width — Full width or contained
Visibility — Show or hide on mobile/desktop

\n\n

Preview and Publish

Use the preview button to see your page as it will appear on the live storefront, including mobile and desktop views. When you are satisfied, save the page and set its status to Published. The page becomes available at its URL immediately.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.172448Z","71c232c5-8eb7-4139-b91c-467f27c2ed73","Visual Page Editor | Cartly Help Center","visual-editor","Visual Page Editor","2026-10-06T07:41:10.331871Z",{"_1551":1986,"_1561":1990,"_1554":1991,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1992,"_1570":1960,"_1544":1993,"_1572":1994,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1995,"_1577":1996},[1987],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":1988},{"_1555":1989},"

Liquid Theme System

Cartly supports a Liquid-based theme engine that gives developers full control over storefront HTML rendering. Unlike the Visual Editor — which uses a drag-and-drop interface and React components — Liquid themes are code-first: you write template files using the Liquid templating language, and Cartly renders them on the server before sending HTML to the browser.

\n\n

Liquid Themes vs. Visual Editor

Visual Editor — No-code, drag-and-drop blocks, ideal for merchants who want quick customization without touching code.
Liquid Themes — Full control over markup and logic, ideal for developers and agencies who need pixel-perfect designs or advanced dynamic content.

Both approaches can coexist. If a Liquid template file exists for a given page, Cartly renders it through the Liquid engine. If no Liquid file is found, the platform falls back to the React component rendered by the Visual Editor.

\n\n

Installing a Theme from the Marketplace

Navigate to Admin → Online Store → Themes.
Click Explore Themes to open the theme marketplace.
Browse or search for a theme, then click Install.
The theme appears in your theme library, ready to preview or publish.

\n\n

Publishing a Theme

In the theme library, find the theme you want to make live and click the Publish button. The published theme is immediately applied to your storefront. You can only have one published theme at a time; the previously published theme is moved back to draft status.

\n\n

Theme File Structure

Every Liquid theme follows a standard directory layout:

my-theme/\n├── layouts/\n│   └── theme.liquid          # Main layout wrapper (header, footer, {content_for_layout})\n├── templates/\n│   ├── index.liquid           # Homepage\n│   ├── product.liquid         # Product detail page\n│   ├── collection.liquid      # Collection page\n│   ├── cart.liquid            # Cart page\n│   ├── page.liquid            # CMS pages\n│   ├── blog.liquid            # Blog listing\n│   └── article.liquid         # Single blog post\n├── sections/\n│   ├── header.liquid          # Header section\n│   ├── footer.liquid          # Footer section\n│   ├── hero.liquid            # Hero banner section\n│   └── featured-products.liquid\n├── snippets/\n│   ├── price.liquid           # Reusable price formatting\n│   ├── product-card.liquid    # Product card partial\n│   └── image.liquid           # Responsive image helper\n├── assets/\n│   ├── theme.css              # Stylesheets\n│   └── theme.js               # Client-side JavaScript\n└── config/\n    ├── settings_schema.json   # Theme-level settings definition\n    └── settings_data.json     # Current settings values

\n\n

How Rendering Works

When a storefront page is requested, Cartly follows this process:

Determine the page type (product, collection, index, etc.).
Check if the published theme contains a matching Liquid template in templates/.
If a Liquid file exists, render it through the Liquid engine with the relevant data context (product, collection, cart, etc.).
Wrap the output in the layouts/theme.liquid layout.
If no Liquid file is found for the requested page, fall back to the default React component rendering pipeline.

This hybrid approach means you can incrementally adopt Liquid — override only the pages you need, and let the platform handle the rest.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.199462Z","9f17c632-023a-4110-b01d-994a8ecd9db8","Liquid Theme System | Cartly Help Center","liquid-themes",25,"Liquid Theme System","2026-10-06T07:41:10.400703Z",{"_1551":1998,"_1561":2002,"_1554":2003,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2004,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2005,"_1572":2006,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2007,"_1577":2008},[1999],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2000},{"_1555":2001},"

Theme Code Editor

The built-in Code Editor lets you modify every file in your Liquid theme directly from the Cartly admin panel — no external tools or FTP required.

\n\n

Opening the Code Editor

Navigate to Admin → Online Store → Themes.
Click on the theme you want to edit.
Click the Edit Code button to launch the editor.

\n\n

File Tree Navigation

The left panel displays the theme's file tree organized by folder: layouts/, templates/, sections/, snippets/, assets/, and config/. Click any file to open it in the editor pane. You can create new files or delete existing ones using the context menu.

\n\n

Monaco Editor Features

The Code Editor is powered by Monaco — the same editor engine used in VS Code. Key features include:

Liquid syntax highlighting — Tags ({% %}), objects ({{ }}), and filters are color-coded for readability.
JSON validation — Schema files (settings_schema.json, settings_data.json) are validated in real time with inline error markers.
CSS and JavaScript support — Full syntax highlighting and auto-completion for stylesheet and script files in the assets/ folder.
Search and replace — Use Ctrl+F (Cmd+F on Mac) to find text within the current file.
Minimap — A miniature overview of the file on the right side for quick navigation in large files.

\n\n

Saving Changes

Press Ctrl+S (Cmd+S on Mac) to save. An auto-save indicator in the toolbar shows the save status. Files are saved directly to the theme on the server.

\n\n

Editing Sections: The Schema Block

Section files (sections/*.liquid) contain a special {% schema %} block at the bottom of the file. This JSON block defines the section's configurable settings that appear in the Visual Editor sidebar. For example:

<div class=\"hero\" style=\"background: {{ section.settings.background_color }}\">\n  <h1>{{ section.settings.heading }}</h1>\n</div>\n\n{%- schema -%}\n{\n  \"name\": \"Hero Banner\",\n  \"settings\": [\n    {\n      \"type\": \"text\",\n      \"id\": \"heading\",\n      \"label\": \"Heading\",\n      \"default\": \"Welcome to our store\"\n    },\n    {\n      \"type\": \"color\",\n      \"id\": \"background_color\",\n      \"label\": \"Background Color\",\n      \"default\": \"#ffffff\"\n    }\n  ]\n}\n{%- endschema -%}

When you edit the {% schema %} block, the corresponding settings panel in the Visual Editor updates automatically.

\n\n

Important: Changes Apply Immediately

Warning: If you are editing the currently published theme, every save in the Code Editor is reflected on the live storefront immediately. To avoid disrupting your customers, we recommend duplicating the theme first, editing the copy, and publishing it only when you are satisfied with the changes.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.202569Z","7bc080ea-964c-402e-af24-7556d86c056a","Theme Code Editor | Cartly Help Center","theme-code-editor",26,"Theme Code Editor","2026-10-06T07:41:10.4085Z",{"_1551":2010,"_1561":2014,"_1554":2015,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2016,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2017,"_1572":2018,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2019,"_1577":2020},[2011],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2012},{"_1555":2013},"

Sections and Schema Blocks

Sections are the building blocks of a Liquid theme. Each section is a self-contained UI module with its own markup, styles, and configurable settings defined in a schema block.

\n\n

What Is a Section?

A section is a Liquid file stored in the sections/ folder (e.g., sections/hero.liquid). It renders a distinct area of a page — a hero banner, a featured product grid, a newsletter signup form, a testimonials carousel, and so on. Sections can be included in templates or added dynamically through the Visual Editor.

\n\n

The Schema Block

Every section file ends with a {% schema %} block — a JSON object that describes the section's metadata and configurable settings. The schema has this structure:

{%- schema -%}\n{\n  \"name\": \"Section Display Name\",\n  \"class\": \"optional-css-class\",\n  \"settings\": [\n    {\n      \"type\": \"text\",\n      \"id\": \"heading\",\n      \"label\": \"Heading\",\n      \"default\": \"Hello World\"\n    }\n  ],\n  \"blocks\": [\n    {\n      \"type\": \"slide\",\n      \"name\": \"Slide\",\n      \"settings\": [\n        {\n          \"type\": \"image_picker\",\n          \"id\": \"image\",\n          \"label\": \"Slide Image\"\n        }\n      ]\n    }\n  ],\n  \"presets\": [\n    {\n      \"name\": \"Default Hero\",\n      \"blocks\": [\n        { \"type\": \"slide\" }\n      ]\n    }\n  ]\n}\n{%- endschema -%}

name — The display name shown in the Visual Editor.
class — An optional CSS class added to the section wrapper element.
settings — An array of configurable fields for the section as a whole.
blocks — Repeatable sub-elements within the section (e.g., slides in a slideshow, items in a list).
presets — Default configurations that appear in the \"Add Section\" picker in the Visual Editor.

\n\n

Settings Types Reference

\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n

Type	Description	Output
`text`	Single-line text input	String
`richtext`	Rich text editor with formatting	HTML string
`image_picker`	Image upload or selection from media library	Image URL
`color`	Color picker with hex value	Hex string (e.g., `#ff0000`)
`select`	Dropdown with predefined options	Selected option value
`checkbox`	Boolean toggle	`true` / `false`
`range`	Numeric slider with min/max/step	Number
`url`	URL input with link picker	URL string

\n\n

How Settings Appear in the Visual Editor

When a merchant opens the Visual Editor and selects a section, the settings defined in the schema are rendered as a form in the sidebar. Text settings become input fields, color settings become color pickers, image_picker settings show the media library browser, and so on. Changes are reflected in the preview in real time.

\n\n

Using Snippets

Snippets are reusable Liquid partials stored in the snippets/ folder. Use them to avoid duplicating code across sections:

<!-- Render a snippet with no arguments -->\n{%- render 'price' -%}\n\n<!-- Pass variables to a snippet -->\n{%- render 'image', image: product.featured_image, size: '400x400' -%}\n\n<!-- Render a snippet for each item in a collection -->\n{%- for product in collection.products -%}\n  {%- render 'product-card', product: product -%}\n{%- endfor -%}

Snippets are isolated — they cannot access variables from the parent template unless you explicitly pass them as arguments.

\n\n

Example: Minimal Section

Here is a complete, minimal section that displays a promotional banner with configurable heading, description, and background color:

<section class=\"promo-banner\" style=\"background-color: {{ section.settings.bg_color }};\">\n  <div class=\"promo-banner__content\">\n    <h2>{{ section.settings.heading }}</h2>\n    <div class=\"promo-banner__text\">{{ section.settings.description }}</div>\n    {%- if section.settings.button_url != blank -%}\n      <a href=\"{{ section.settings.button_url }}\" class=\"btn\">\n        {{ section.settings.button_label | default: 'Shop Now' }}\n      </a>\n    {%- endif -%}\n  </div>\n</section>\n\n{%- schema -%}\n{\n  \"name\": \"Promo Banner\",\n  \"class\": \"section-promo\",\n  \"settings\": [\n    {\n      \"type\": \"text\",\n      \"id\": \"heading\",\n      \"label\": \"Heading\",\n      \"default\": \"Special Offer\"\n    },\n    {\n      \"type\": \"richtext\",\n      \"id\": \"description\",\n      \"label\": \"Description\",\n      \"default\": \"<p>Get 20% off all items this weekend.</p>\"\n    },\n    {\n      \"type\": \"color\",\n      \"id\": \"bg_color\",\n      \"label\": \"Background Color\",\n      \"default\": \"#f5f5f5\"\n    },\n    {\n      \"type\": \"url\",\n      \"id\": \"button_url\",\n      \"label\": \"Button Link\"\n    },\n    {\n      \"type\": \"text\",\n      \"id\": \"button_label\",\n      \"label\": \"Button Label\",\n      \"default\": \"Shop Now\"\n    }\n  ],\n  \"presets\": [\n    {\n      \"name\": \"Promo Banner\"\n    }\n  ]\n}\n{%- endschema -%}

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.20668Z","3275ddbe-0fe7-4f1b-9c28-5b235df4c3d3","Sections and Schema Blocks | Cartly Help Center","theme-sections-schema",27,"Sections and Schema Blocks","2026-10-06T07:41:10.418878Z",{"_1551":2022,"_1561":2026,"_1554":2027,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2028,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2029,"_1572":1612,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2030,"_1577":2031},[2023],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2024},{"_1555":2025},"

Managing Navigation Menus

Navigation menus define the links that appear in your store's header and footer, helping customers browse your products and pages.

\n\n

Menu Types

Cartly supports two primary menu locations:

Header menu — The main navigation in your store header. This is where customers expect to find links to collections, product categories, and key pages.
Footer menu — Links in the footer area. Typically includes legal pages (privacy, terms), about pages, and secondary navigation.

\n\n

Creating Menu Items

Navigate to Online Store → Navigation. Select the menu you want to edit and click Add Item. For each item, configure:

Label — The text displayed in the navigation (e.g., \"Shop\", \"About Us\")
URL — The link destination. You can link to collections, products, pages, blog posts, or external URLs.

\n\n

Nested Menus

Create dropdown menus by nesting items. Drag a menu item slightly to the right to make it a child of the item above. Nested items appear as a dropdown when customers hover over the parent item. You can nest up to three levels deep.

\n\n

Link Types

When adding a link, you can choose from:

Collection — Link to a product collection page
Product — Link to a specific product
Page — Link to a CMS page
Blog — Link to the blog or a specific blog post
External URL — Link to any URL outside your store

\n\n

Reordering Items

Drag and drop menu items to reorder them. The order in the editor matches the order on your storefront. Top-level items appear from left to right in the header, and top to bottom in the footer.

\n\n

Mobile Navigation

On mobile devices, the header menu automatically converts to a hamburger menu. Nested items are shown as expandable accordions. The menu is optimized for touch interaction with appropriate tap targets.

\n\n

Best Practices

Keep the header menu to 5-7 top-level items for clean navigation
Use descriptive labels — \"Women's Clothing\" is clearer than \"Category 1\"
Place your most important collections in the header menu
Use the footer for legal pages, contact, and secondary links

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.175016Z","8e906235-8098-46c0-98d9-cbcb6e489a1b","Navigation Menus | Cartly Help Center","navigation-menus","Navigation Menus","2026-10-06T07:41:10.344434Z",{"_1551":2033,"_1561":2037,"_1554":2038,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2039,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2040,"_1572":1612,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2041,"_1577":2042},[2034],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2035},{"_1555":2036},"

How Theme Customizations Work

Cartly themes use a fork-on-write model. Every theme file starts as a stock file served directly by the platform — it is not copied into your shop's database. A file is only \"forked\" (saved to your shop) when you explicitly edit it in the code editor.

\n\n

Synced vs Custom files

Open the code editor (Online Store → Themes → Edit Code) and look at the file tree. Each file has a badge:

Synced — stock file from the platform. You have not edited it. Platform updates flow in automatically whenever Cartly releases improvements.
Custom — you have edited this file. A copy exists in your shop's database. Platform updates to this file will not overwrite your version.
New — a file you created from scratch. Has no platform equivalent.

\n\n

When does a fork happen?

A fork happens the first time you save an edit to a Synced file. Here's the exact sequence:

Click a Synced file — it opens read-only with a blue banner.
Click Edit file (or press ⌘E on Mac / Ctrl+E on Windows).
A confirmation modal appears explaining the fork. Click Confirm.
The file becomes editable. Edit and press ⌘S to save.
The badge changes to Custom. Your version is now stored in the database.

\n\n

Reverting to default

To go back to the stock platform version, open the Custom file and click Revert to default in the toolbar. This deletes your custom copy. The file returns to Synced state and will receive platform updates again.

\n\n

What happens when Cartly updates a file you've customized?

If Cartly ships improvements to a file you have forked, an amber banner appears at the top of the editor: This file has been updated upstream. Your custom version is untouched — you decide what to do:

View diff — compare the new platform version against your version side by side.
Sync upstream — replace your version with the updated platform version. This is permanent.
Do nothing — keep your version as-is. The amber banner remains as a reminder.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.380568Z","7db7371d-08bd-4667-9c3a-8ff82e6bf4e9","How Theme Customizations Work | Cartly Help Center","theme-customizations","How Theme Customizations Work","2026-10-06T07:41:10.945744Z",{"_1551":2044,"_1561":2048,"_1554":2049,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2050,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2051,"_1572":2052,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2053,"_1577":2054},[2045],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2046},{"_1555":2047},"

Using the Code Editor

The code editor lets you view and edit every file in your active theme directly from the Cartly admin. No FTP, no external tools required.

\n\n

Opening the editor

Go to Online Store → Themes.
Click your active theme, then click Edit Code.

\n\n

File tree

The left panel shows all theme files organized into folders: layouts/, templates/, sections/, snippets/, assets/, config/, and locales/. Each file has a badge:

Synced — stock platform file, read-only until you fork it.
Custom — your edited version. Fully editable.
New — a file you created.

Use the filter chips (All / Modified / Synced) at the top of the tree to focus on just your customizations.

\n\n

Editing a file

Click a Custom or New file to open it directly.
Click a Synced file — it opens read-only. Click Edit file or press ⌘E to fork it and start editing.
Press ⌘S (Mac) or Ctrl+S (Windows) to save changes.

\n\n

Keyboard shortcuts

\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n

Shortcut	Action
`⌘S` / `Ctrl+S`	Save current file
`⌘E` / `Ctrl+E`	Fork the active Synced file (opens edit mode)
`⌘F` / `Ctrl+F`	Find in current file

\n\n

Preview button

Click Preview in the top toolbar to open your storefront in a new browser tab. The preview reflects the current state of all saved files. Preview links expire after 15 minutes.

\n\n

Creating a new file

Click the + icon in the file tree header.
Choose a file type: Section (generates a working scaffold), Snippet, Asset, or other.
Enter a file name and click Create.
The new file opens immediately and is ready to edit.

\n\n

Deleting a file

Right-click a Custom or New file and choose Delete. Deleting a Custom file reverts it to the stock platform version (Synced). Deleting a New file removes it entirely.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.384333Z","6c03bc21-bddf-4f0c-bbd2-318b4cfb7092","Using the Code Editor | Cartly Help Center","using-the-code-editor",31,"Using the Code Editor","2026-10-06T07:41:10.955363Z",{"_1551":2056,"_1561":2060,"_1554":2061,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2062,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2063,"_1572":2064,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2065,"_1577":2066},[2057],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2058},{"_1555":2059},"

Comparing Your Edits to the Original

When you have forked a theme file (it has a Custom badge), you can compare your version against the original platform version at any time — without affecting your live storefront.

\n\n

Opening the diff view

Open the code editor and click any Custom file.
In the file toolbar, click Compare with original.
A split-screen view opens. The left pane shows the platform (original) version. The right pane shows your version.
Changed lines are highlighted. Unchanged sections are collapsed to save space.
Both panes are read-only in diff mode — use it for reference only.
Click Close diff to return to the normal editor.

\n\n

The Upstream updated banner

If Cartly ships an improved version of a section you have forked, an amber banner appears at the top of the editor: This file has been updated upstream.

This means the platform version is newer than the snapshot we recorded when you forked the file. Your custom version is unchanged — the banner is a notification only.

Your options:

View diff — opens the diff view comparing the new platform version (left) against your current version (right). Use this to decide whether to merge changes manually.
Sync upstream — replaces your version with the new platform version. Your custom copy is deleted. The file returns to Synced state.

\n\n

Sync All upstream

If multiple files have upstream updates, a Sync All upstream button appears in the top toolbar. Clicking it syncs all affected files at once — replacing each custom version with the latest platform version. Use with caution: this action cannot be undone.

\n\n

Should I sync or keep my version?

It depends on what changed:

If the platform added a bug fix or accessibility improvement and you have not changed those lines, syncing is safe.
If the platform changed an area you have customized (e.g., the heading markup you restyled), review the diff first and manually merge the relevant lines before syncing.
When in doubt, use View diff to understand the changes before committing to a sync.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.387693Z","bf565857-261e-4a23-bbe1-5cd36b64a1a8","Compare & Sync Upstream | Cartly Help Center","compare-and-sync-upstream",32,"Comparing Your Edits to the Original","2026-10-06T07:41:10.963945Z",{"_1551":2068,"_1561":2072,"_1554":2073,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2074,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2075,"_1572":2076,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2077,"_1577":2078},[2069],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2070},{"_1555":2071},"

Creating a New Theme Section

Sections are the building blocks of your storefront pages. You can create custom sections from scratch in the code editor and they will appear in the Visual Editor's + Add panel — ready to drag onto any page.

\n\n

What is a section?

A section is a Liquid template file in the sections/ folder. It contains:

HTML markup — the structure rendered on your storefront.
Liquid logic — dynamic content from products, settings, or your shop.
Schema block — a JSON block at the bottom of the file that defines the settings merchants can configure in the Visual Editor sidebar.

\n\n

Creating a new section

Open the code editor (Online Store → Themes → Edit Code).
Click the + icon in the file tree header.
In the modal, select Section as the file type.
Enter a name (e.g., my-banner). Cartly will create sections/my-banner.liquid.
Click Create.

Cartly generates a working scaffold automatically — full HTML structure, five example settings (a heading text field, color picker, range slider, checkbox, and image picker), and a preset with default values. You can edit the scaffold immediately.

\n\n

Understanding the schema block

The {%- schema -%} block at the bottom of the file controls what appears in the Visual Editor sidebar when a merchant selects this section. Key fields:

name — the display name shown in the + Add panel (e.g., \"Feature Grid\").
settings — an array of configurable fields. Each field has a type, an id (used in Liquid as section.settings.id), a label, and optionally a default value.
presets — an array of preset configurations. At least one preset is required. Without a preset, the section does not appear in the + Add panel.

\n\n

Why presets matter

When a merchant clicks + Add section in the Visual Editor, they see a list of sections with their preset configurations. The preset provides a ready-to-use starting point — default text, default colors, and a default set of blocks. Without a preset, your section is invisible to the Visual Editor. Always include at least one.

\n\n

Available setting types

\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n

Type	What it shows in the editor
`text`	Single-line text input
`textarea`	Multi-line text area
`image_picker`	Media library selector
`color`	Color picker
`range`	Slider with min, max, and step
`select`	Dropdown — requires an `options` array
`checkbox`	On/off toggle
`url`	URL input
`product`	Product search typeahead
`collection`	Collection search typeahead

\n\n

After saving

Save the file with ⌘S (Mac) or Ctrl+S (Windows). Open the Visual Editor (Online Store → Themes → Customize) and click + Add section — your new section appears in the list, ready to add to any page.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.391076Z","fe2280eb-c4ba-4207-9ca8-7d5e1c25981a","Creating a New Theme Section | Cartly Help Center","creating-a-new-section",33,"Creating a New Theme Section","2026-10-06T07:41:10.970169Z",{"_1551":2080,"_1561":2084,"_1554":2085,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2086,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2087,"_1572":2088,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2089,"_1577":2090},[2081],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2082},{"_1555":2083},"

What Are Storefront Filters?

Storefront filters are the sidebar filter panels that appear on your collection pages. They let customers narrow the product list by colour, size, price, tags, or any custom attribute you define. Filters are powered by Typesense and update results instantly without a page reload.

\n\n

Filters That Appear Automatically

Cartly detects your product data and creates filter groups automatically — no configuration needed:

Variant options — every option key on your variants (e.g. Color, Size, Material) becomes a filter group. Values are populated from your actual product data.
Product tags — if your products use tags, a Tags filter appears.
Vendor — appears when at least one product has a vendor set.
Availability — in-stock only toggle.
Price range — min/max range from your actual prices.

\n\n

Customising Your Filters

Go to Admin → Settings → Storefront Filters to customise the defaults. For each filter you can:

Reorder — drag the handle to move filters up or down in the sidebar.
Relabel — change the display name (e.g. rename \"Color\" to \"Colour\" for your market).
Change display type — chips (default), swatches (for colours), range slider (for price), radio buttons, or checkboxes.
Hide — suppress filters that are not relevant to your product range.
Scope — apply overrides to all collections (Global) or only to a specific collection.

Click + Add filter to customise a filter that does not yet have an override. The modal groups available filters by type: built-in, variant options, and product metafields.

\n\n

Reindexing

Your product index updates automatically whenever you save product changes. However, some situations require a full reindex:

You created a new filterable Metafield Definition.
You suspect the filter counts are out of date.

Click Reindex products in Settings → Storefront Filters. A progress bar shows the indexing status. For large catalogues this takes up to a few minutes.

\n\n

Which Theme Template Do I Need?

If you are using one of the Cartly marketplace themes (Linen, Vogue, TechPro, Crafter), the filter sidebar is already built in — no code changes needed. If you are using a custom theme, add the filter rendering code to your collection section. See the developer guide for the Liquid snippet.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.396244Z","7eb956dc-dfaa-47e8-88fc-a7b704cbca14","Storefront Filters Overview | Cartly Help Center","storefront-filters-overview",34,"Storefront Filters — Overview","2026-10-06T07:41:10.981614Z",{"_1551":2092,"_1561":2096,"_1554":2097,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2098,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2099,"_1572":2100,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2101,"_1577":2102},[2093],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2094},{"_1555":2095},"

What Are Custom Filters?

In addition to the built-in filters (colour, size, price, tags), you can create filters for any product attribute — Brand, Material, Width, Fit, or anything your catalogue needs. Custom filters use the Metafields system and appear in the storefront sidebar automatically once products have values.

\n\n

Step 1 — Create a Metafield Definition

Go to Admin → Settings → Custom Data (or Settings → Metafields).
Under Product Metafields, click + Add Definition.
Fill in:\n
- Name — the human-readable label (e.g. \"Brand\").
- Namespace — a grouping prefix (e.g. \"custom\").
- Key — the identifier (e.g. \"brand\").
- Field type — choose from: Single line text, Number (integer), Number (decimal), True/False, Color, or List of text values.
\n
Check \"Available as filter on collection pages\".
Optionally set a filter label and display type (chips, swatches, etc.).
Click Create.

Cartly automatically updates the search index schema. This takes a few seconds.

\n\n

Step 2 — Assign Values to Products

Open a product at Admin → Products → [product name].
Scroll to the Metafields section at the bottom of the page.
Find your new definition (e.g. \"Brand\") and enter a value (e.g. \"Nike\").
Click Save.

Cartly reindexes the product automatically. Repeat for all products you want included in this filter. Once at least one product has a value, the filter bucket appears in the collection sidebar.

\n\n

Step 3 — Customise the Filter (Optional)

The new filter appears automatically with default settings. To customise it:

Go to Admin → Settings → Storefront Filters.
Click + Add filter.
In the modal, scroll to the Product Metafields section and select your new filter.
Set the label, display type, position, and scope (Global or a specific collection).
Click Save.

\n\n

Frequently Asked Questions

How long does it take for the filter to appear?

Usually a few seconds after you save a product with a metafield value. The product is reindexed automatically on save. If the filter does not appear after a minute, use Reindex products in Settings → Storefront Filters.

What field types support filtering?

Single line text, Number (integer), Number (decimal), True/False, Color, and List of text values. Date and Rich text fields are not supported as filter types.

Can I filter by variant metafields?

Yes — create a Variant Metafield Definition and check the filterable toggle. The URL scheme uses a filter.v.v.metafields. prefix for variant metafields.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.400746Z","de333e01-96c1-406a-8547-38817ed52454","Creating Custom Filters with Metafields | Cartly Help Center","creating-custom-filters",35,"Creating Custom Filters with Metafields","2026-10-06T07:41:10.989411Z",{"_1551":2104,"_1561":2108,"_1554":2109,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2110,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2111,"_1572":2112,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2113,"_1577":2114},[2105],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2106},{"_1555":2107},"

What Are Section Groups?

Section Groups are named containers in your theme template that separate header and footer sections from the main page body. The two built-in groups are Header and Footer. Sections assigned to a group appear above or below the page content, on every page that uses that template.

\n\n

Header Group

The Header group typically contains your store navigation, logo, and announcement banner. These sections appear at the top of every page and are shared across all page types that reference the same template.

In the Visual Editor, click the Header tab in the left sidebar to manage header sections. You can:

Edit header settings (logo, menu, sticky behaviour).
Add or remove sections within the header group (e.g. add an announcement bar).
Reorder sections within the group.

\n\n

Footer Group

The Footer group contains your store's footer — links, newsletter sign-up, social media icons, and legal text. Manage it via the Footer tab in the Visual Editor sidebar.

\n\n

How Is This Different from Regular Sections?

Regular sections (in the page body tab) appear only on the specific page type you are editing. Header and footer sections appear on every page — changes to the header on your homepage also affect your product pages, collection pages, and all other pages.

\n\n

Editing Header and Footer Code

If you want to edit the Liquid code behind the header or footer:

Go to Online Store → Themes → Edit Code.
In the file tree, find sections/header.liquid or sections/footer.liquid.
Click the file to open it (read-only if it is a stock file).
Click Edit file (or press ⌘E) to fork it and start editing.

After saving, your changes appear immediately in the Visual Editor preview. Use the Preview button in the toolbar to check how the header looks on your live storefront.

\n\n

Using a Different Header per Page Type

If you need a different header layout for a specific page (e.g. a minimal header for your checkout landing page), create an alternate template in the code editor — for example templates/page.minimal.json — with its own header-group configuration. Then assign that template to the specific CMS page from the page edit form.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.408573Z","130cc8b6-59a5-4c78-b963-a2ce24b5e9c9","Using Section Groups | Cartly Help Center","using-section-groups",36,"Using Section Groups in the Theme Editor","2026-10-06T07:41:11.004175Z",{"_1551":2116,"_1561":2120,"_1554":2121,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2122,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2123,"_1572":1624,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2124,"_1577":2125},[2117],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2118},{"_1555":2119},"

Creating Static Pages

Cartly's CMS lets you create custom pages for your storefront — about pages, contact information, FAQs, legal pages, and more.

\n\n

Creating a Page

Navigate to Online Store → Pages and click Add Page. Fill in the following fields:

Title — The page heading, also used as the browser tab title
Handle — The URL slug for the page (e.g., \"about-us\" creates /pages/about-us). Auto-generated from the title.
Content — Rich text editor with support for headings, paragraphs, lists, links, images, and embedded content

\n\n

Rich Text Editor

The content editor provides a WYSIWYG experience with a toolbar for formatting:

Headings (H1 through H4)
Bold, italic, and underline
Ordered and unordered lists
Links with target options
Image insertion
Block quotes
Code blocks

\n\n

Visual Editor

For more complex page layouts, use the visual editor instead of the rich text editor. The visual editor offers drag-and-drop sections with full layout control. See the Visual Page Editor guide for details.

\n\n

Page Templates

Select a template to control the page layout. Available templates include:

Default — Standard content page with header and footer
Full Width — Content stretches edge to edge without sidebar constraints
Sidebar — Content with a navigation sidebar

\n\n

SEO Settings

Each page has SEO fields at the bottom of the editor:

Meta Title — Custom title for search engines (defaults to page title)
Meta Description — Custom snippet for search results (keep under 160 characters)

Pages are automatically added to your sitemap when published.

\n\n

Publishing

Set the page status to Published to make it live. Draft pages are only visible in the admin panel. You can schedule publishing by saving as draft and manually publishing later.

\n\n

Common Pages

Most stores need these essential pages: About Us, Contact, Shipping Policy, Return Policy, Privacy Policy, and Terms of Service. Cartly provides templates for legal pages that you can customize with your store's specific policies.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.177357Z","430ce076-c12d-4203-b622-ef863bb5b678","Pages & CMS | Cartly Help Center","pages-cms","Pages & CMS","2026-10-06T07:41:10.352222Z",{"_1551":2127,"_1561":2131,"_1554":2132,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2133,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2134,"_1572":1636,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2135,"_1577":2136},[2128],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2129},{"_1555":2130},"

Managing Your Store Blog

A built-in blog helps you create content that drives organic traffic to your store and engages your customers.

\n\n

Creating Blog Posts

Navigate to Online Store → Blog and click Add Post. Fill in:

Title — The post headline
Content — Rich text article content with full formatting support
Excerpt — A short summary shown in blog listing pages and search results
Featured Image — The main image displayed at the top of the post and in listings
Author — The post author name
Tags — Labels for categorization and filtering

\n\n

Blog Categories

Organize posts into categories (e.g., \"News\", \"Tutorials\", \"Product Updates\"). Categories create filtered views of your blog and help customers find relevant content. Each post can belong to one category.

\n\n

Writing for SEO

Blog posts are powerful tools for search engine optimization. Tips for effective blog SEO:

Use your target keywords naturally in the title and first paragraph
Structure content with H2 and H3 headings for readability
Write posts of at least 500 words for better search rankings
Add internal links to relevant products and collections
Use descriptive alt text on all images

\n\n

Blog URL Structure

Blog posts are accessible at /blog/your-post-slug. The slug is auto-generated from the title but can be customized. The blog index page at /blog shows all published posts with pagination.

\n\n

Publishing and Scheduling

Posts can be saved as drafts and published when ready. The published date is set automatically when you first publish, but you can backdate it if needed. Posts are sorted by published date on the blog index.

\n\n

Blog in Navigation

Add a link to your blog in the header or footer navigation menu. You can link to the main blog page or to specific categories. Many stores add the blog to the header menu as \"Journal\" or \"News\".

\n\n

RSS Feed

Cartly automatically generates an RSS feed for your blog, allowing readers to subscribe and receive updates through their preferred RSS reader.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.181519Z","fa01ae7a-1821-40e5-b673-df08e5808b08","Blog & Articles | Cartly Help Center","blog-articles","Blog & Articles","2026-10-06T07:41:10.362691Z",{"_1551":2138,"_1561":2142,"_1554":2143,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2144,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2145,"_1572":1636,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2146,"_1577":2147},[2139],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2140},{"_1555":2141},"

GitHub Theme Sync

Cartly can automatically keep your theme up to date with a GitHub repository. Whenever you push changes to the connected branch, your storefront theme updates within minutes — no manual uploads required.

\n\n

Requirements

A Cartly Pro or Enterprise plan (GitHub sync is not available on Starter/Growth)
A GitHub account with access to the repository you want to connect
The theme must already be installed in your store's theme library

\n\n

Step 1: Connect Your GitHub Account

Navigate to Online Store → Themes and click Add Theme → Connect from GitHub. A popup will open asking you to authorize Cartly to read your repositories. Click Authorize and complete the GitHub login.

\n\n

Step 2: Choose a Repository and Branch

After authorization, a dialog will show your accessible repositories. Select the repository containing your theme files and choose the branch you want to deploy from (usually main or production). Then choose which theme slot in your library to update.

\n\n

Step 3: Initial Sync

Click Connect. Cartly downloads all files from the repository and populates your theme. This initial sync may take up to a minute depending on the number of files. A Syncing badge appears on the theme card while the process is running.

\n\n

Automatic Updates

After setup, any push to the connected branch automatically triggers an update. Changed files are detected and applied within about 2 minutes. A sync status badge on the theme card shows whether the last sync was successful:

Synced (green) — last sync completed successfully
Syncing (blue) — sync in progress
Error (red) — last sync failed; hover for the error message

\n\n

Read-Only Mode

While a theme is connected to GitHub, theme files cannot be edited manually in the Cartly code editor. An amber banner in the editor reminds you that the repo is the source of truth. To make manual edits, disconnect the repository first.

\n\n

Disconnecting

Open the theme code editor and click Disconnect from GitHub in the banner, or navigate to Themes, open the theme options, and select Disconnect Repository. After disconnecting, the theme files remain in place and can be edited freely.

\n\n

Troubleshooting

Sync not triggering — Verify the GitHub webhook is set up in your repo's Settings → Webhooks pointing to your store.
Missing files — Check that the repository contains a valid theme structure (layouts/, sections/, templates/).
Authentication error — Reconnect your GitHub account from Online Store → Themes → Add Theme → Connect from GitHub.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.292953Z","2dfd3bce-05c1-4ab7-add0-6a239aa148a9","Connecting Your Theme to GitHub | Cartly Help Center","github-theme-sync","Connecting Your Theme to a GitHub Repository","2026-10-06T07:41:10.720448Z",{"_1551":2149,"_1561":2153,"_1554":2154,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2155,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2156,"_1572":1649,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2157,"_1577":2158},[2150],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2151},{"_1555":2152},"

Search Engine Optimization

Cartly includes built-in SEO features to help your store rank well in search engines like Google and Bing.

\n\n

Meta Tags

Every page in your store has customizable meta tags:

Meta Title — The title shown in search results and browser tabs. Keep under 60 characters. If not set, defaults to the page/product title plus your store name.
Meta Description — The snippet shown below the title in search results. Keep under 160 characters. Write compelling descriptions that encourage clicks.

Meta tags can be set on products, collections, pages, and blog posts.

\n\n

URL Structure

Cartly generates clean, SEO-friendly URLs:

Products: /products/your-product-slug
Collections: /collections/your-collection-slug
Pages: /pages/your-page-handle
Blog: /blog/your-post-slug

Slugs are auto-generated from titles but can be customized. Use hyphens between words and keep URLs short and descriptive.

\n\n

Sitemap

Cartly automatically generates an XML sitemap at /sitemap.xml. The sitemap includes all published products, collections, pages, and blog posts. Search engines use the sitemap to discover and index your pages. The sitemap updates automatically when you add or remove content.

\n\n

Redirects

When you change a product or page URL, create a redirect from the old URL to the new one. Navigate to Online Store → Redirects to manage URL redirects. Redirects use 301 status codes (permanent) to transfer SEO value from the old URL to the new one.

\n\n

Robots.txt

Cartly generates a robots.txt file automatically that allows search engines to crawl your storefront pages while blocking admin, checkout, and account pages from indexing.

\n\n

Structured Data

Product pages include JSON-LD structured data that helps search engines understand your product information. This can result in rich snippets in search results showing price, availability, and ratings.

\n\n

Performance and SEO

Page speed is a ranking factor. Cartly's server-side rendering delivers complete HTML to search engines on the first request, with TTFB under 100ms on cached pages. This ensures search engine crawlers receive fully rendered content without waiting for JavaScript execution.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.185453Z","8f6090de-15dc-4a09-b75f-712d1845f01c","SEO Basics | Cartly Help Center","seo-basics","SEO Basics","2026-10-06T07:41:10.373256Z",{"_1551":2160,"_1561":2164,"_1554":2165,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2166,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2167,"_1572":1662,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2168,"_1577":2169},[2161],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2162},{"_1555":2163},"

Setting Up a Custom Domain

By default, your store is accessible at your-store.cartly.pro. You can connect your own domain name for a professional branded experience.

\n\n

Prerequisites

You own a domain name registered with any domain registrar (GoDaddy, Namecheap, Cloudflare, etc.)
You have access to your domain's DNS settings
Your Cartly store is on the Growth plan or higher

\n\n

Step 1: Add Your Domain in Cartly

Navigate to Settings → Domains and click Add Domain. Enter your domain name (e.g., www.yourstore.com or yourstore.com). Cartly generates a verification token and the required DNS records.

\n\n

Step 2: Configure DNS Records

Log into your domain registrar's DNS management and add the following records:

CNAME record — Point www to shops.cartly.pro. This directs traffic from your www subdomain to Cartly's servers.
A record (for root domain) — Point your root domain to Cartly's IP address. This handles traffic for yourstore.com without the www prefix.
TXT record — Add the verification token provided by Cartly. This proves you own the domain.

DNS changes can take up to 48 hours to propagate, though most updates complete within 1-2 hours.

\n\n

Step 3: Verify and Activate

Return to Settings → Domains and click Verify. Cartly checks the DNS records and, if correct, activates your custom domain. SSL certificates are provisioned automatically via Let's Encrypt — your store will be accessible over HTTPS within minutes of verification.

\n\n

SSL Certificates

Cartly automatically provisions and renews SSL certificates for your custom domain using Let's Encrypt. All traffic is forced to HTTPS — HTTP requests are automatically redirected. You do not need to purchase or manage SSL certificates.

\n\n

Root Domain vs. WWW

We recommend using the www subdomain as your primary domain and setting up a redirect from the root domain. This provides better CDN compatibility and DNS flexibility. Cartly handles the redirect automatically once both records are configured.

\n\n

Troubleshooting

Verification fails — Double-check that the TXT record value matches exactly. Allow time for DNS propagation.
SSL not working — SSL provisioning can take up to 15 minutes. Ensure your DNS records are correct.
Mixed content warnings — If you see browser warnings, check that all images and resources use HTTPS URLs.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.188763Z","0fd1834d-0297-48a7-906b-2903b99f36bd","Custom Domain | Cartly Help Center","custom-domain","Custom Domain","2026-10-06T07:41:10.383541Z",{"_1551":2171,"_1561":2175,"_1554":2176,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2177,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2178,"_1572":1754,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2179,"_1577":2180},[2172],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2173},{"_1555":2174},"

Using Templates

Templates control the layout of your product and collection pages. Different products may benefit from different layouts — a clothing item might need a size guide section, while a tech product needs specification tables.

\n\n

What Are Templates?

A template defines the section layout for product or collection pages. Each template consists of ordered sections (hero image, description, specifications, reviews, related products) that are rendered when displaying a product or collection assigned to that template.

\n\n

Default Templates

Cartly includes default templates for products and collections that work well for most stores:

Default Product Template — Image gallery, title, price, variant selector, add to cart, description, and reviews
Default Collection Template — Collection image, description, product grid with filtering and sorting

\n\n

Creating Custom Templates

Navigate to Online Store → Templates and click Create Template. Choose whether it is a product or collection template and give it a name (e.g., \"Tech Product\", \"Lookbook Collection\").

Use the visual editor to arrange sections:

Add sections from the palette (image gallery, text, specs table, reviews, related products, etc.)
Configure each section's settings (layout, colors, content source)
Reorder sections by dragging
Preview the template with sample data

\n\n

Assigning Templates to Products

On the product edit page, select a template from the Template dropdown. Products without an assigned template use the default. You can change a product's template at any time — the change is reflected immediately on the storefront.

\n\n

Template Sections

Common sections available for product templates:

Image Gallery — Product images with thumbnails and zoom
Product Info — Title, price, variants, and add to cart
Description — Full product description
Specifications — Key-value specification table
Size Guide — Size chart specific to the product type
Reviews — Customer reviews and ratings
Related Products — Products from the same collection or with matching tags
Custom Content — Rich text, images, or HTML

\n\n

Duplicating Templates

To create a variation of an existing template, click Duplicate. This creates a copy that you can modify independently. Useful for creating specialized versions of a base layout.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.195202Z","c12f9dfe-82d1-4022-abc2-759df79ab082","Product & Collection Templates | Cartly Help Center","templates","Product & Collection Templates","2026-10-06T07:41:10.392797Z",{"_1551":2182,"_1561":2186,"_1554":2187,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2188,"_1568":2189,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2190,"_1572":2191,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2192,"_1577":2193},[2183],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2184},{"_1555":2185},"

What Are Metaobjects?

Metaobjects let you create fully custom content types for your store. Think of them as flexible databases you design yourself — FAQs, team members, testimonials, size guides, or any other structured content your theme needs.

Creating a Definition

Go to Admin → Content → Metaobjects
Click Add Definition
Enter a type name (e.g. faq_item) and a display name
Add fields: choose from text, number, boolean, date, URL, color, file, product reference, and more
Set access to Storefront or Admin only
Click Save

Adding Entries

Go to Content → Metaobjects and select your definition
Click Add Entry
Fill in the fields and save

Entries appear on your storefront automatically — no theme changes needed for existing templates that use metaobjects.

Using on Your Storefront

In Liquid templates, use metaobjects.TYPE.entries to loop over your entries:

{% for item in metaobjects.faq_item.entries %}\n  <h3>{{ item.fields.question }}</h3>\n  <p>{{ item.fields.answer }}</p>\n{% endfor %}

Access Control

When you set a definition to Admin only, its entries will not be visible on the storefront. This is useful for internal content like pricing notes or staff-only information.

Limits

Up to 50 entries per type in Liquid templates
Up to 250 entries total per page render

For larger datasets, use the GraphQL API or Storefront API directly.

GraphQL Access

Developers can query metaobjects via the GraphQL API using metaobjects(type). See the Metaobjects Developer Guide for details.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.329137Z","86371d94-6244-434d-af28-0ca128420800","Create custom structured content types and display them on your storefront using Liquid templates.","Metaobjects | Cartly Help Center","using-metaobjects",120,"Using Metaobjects for Custom Content","2026-10-06T07:41:10.83987Z",{"_1551":2195,"_1561":2199,"_1554":2200,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2201,"_1568":2202,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2203,"_1572":2204,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2205,"_1577":2206},[2196],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2197},{"_1555":2198},"

What Are Section Blocks?

Some theme sections contain repeating content units called blocks — for example, a Testimonials section where each testimonial is a block, or a Features section where each feature card is a block. Each block has its own settings (text, image, link) separate from the section's overall settings.

\n\n

Open a Section's Blocks

Open the Visual Editor for your theme: go to Online Store → Themes and click Customize.
Click any section in the preview or select it from the page structure panel on the left.
In the right panel, the section's own settings appear at the top. Scroll down — below the settings you will see the Blocks accordion.
Each block in the section is listed as a collapsible row labeled with the block's type name and, if the block has a text field, a preview of its content.

\n\n

Edit a Block's Content

Click a block row in the accordion to expand it.
The block's settings fields appear below the row — the same kinds of inputs as section settings: text, image picker, color, toggle, etc.
Edit the field values. The storefront preview updates in real time.
When a block row is expanded, the preview highlights the matching element in the storefront with a brief pulse animation so you know exactly which block you are editing.
Click Save to publish your changes.

\n\n

What the Visual Editor Supports for Blocks

Editing any block's settings fields with live preview.
Seeing which block in the storefront corresponds to the row you have open.

\n\n

What Requires the Code Editor

Structural changes to blocks — adding a new block, removing a block, changing a block's type, or reordering blocks — require the Code Editor (Online Store → Themes → Actions → Edit code). Open the template JSON file for the relevant page (e.g. templates/index.json for the home page) and edit the blocks map and block_order array directly.

\n\n

Why Are My Blocks Not Showing in the Accordion?

The section has no blocks configured — the accordion does not appear if the section has zero blocks in its template JSON. Use the code editor to add a block first.
The section's Liquid file does not support blocks — not every section uses blocks. The block panel only appears for sections whose schema declares a blocks array.
Nested blocks are not supported — Cartly does not support blocks-within-blocks. If your theme declares nested blocks, they are silently ignored by the renderer.

","2026-06-20T09:27:39.936837Z","b6626f29-a540-4f3a-afb0-5ae8c34a4cfd","How to edit section block content in the Cartly Visual Editor — expanding blocks, changing settings, and what requires the code editor.","Editing Section Blocks in the Theme Editor | Cartly Help Center","editing-section-blocks-in-the-theme-editor",135,"Editing Section Blocks in the Theme Editor","2026-10-06T07:41:11.117873Z",{"_1551":2208,"_1561":2212,"_1554":2213,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2214,"_1568":2215,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2216,"_1572":2217,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2218,"_1577":2219},[2209],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2210},{"_1555":2211},"

What is Clarity?

Clarity is Cartly's featured editorial theme, available in the AppStore themes catalogue. It ships with a warm-gold accent palette, Playfair Display headings, and a curated set of sections designed for brand-forward storefronts.

\n\n

Installing Clarity

Go to Online Store → Themes in your admin panel.
Click Visit Theme Store and find the Clarity theme.
Click Add to Library. Clarity installs alongside your current active theme — your live storefront is not affected.
Click Publish when you are ready to make Clarity your active theme. A confirmation dialog confirms that the switch is live immediately.

\n\n

Customising Colors and Typography

Open Online Store → Themes → Customize (with Clarity as the active or previewing theme). The Theme Settings panel on the left contains:

Colors — change the primary, accent, background, and text colours using the color pickers.
Typography — choose heading and body fonts from the Google Fonts list.
Layout — adjust the maximum container width and section spacing.

Changes are previewed in real time in the storefront preview iframe. Click Save to apply.

\n\n

Customising Sections

In the Visual Editor, click any section to open its settings in the sidebar. Clarity sections include:

Hero — full-width header with headline overlay, subtext, and up to two call-to-action buttons.
Featured Collection — product grid with Quick-Add cards; configure which collection to show and the number of columns.
Image with Text — side-by-side image and text panel; toggle left/right image position.
Testimonials — customer quote carousel with star rating.
Newsletter — email sign-up form connected to your subscriber list.

To add a section: click the + button in the editor left panel and pick from the Clarity section library.

\n\n

Editing Theme Code

Advanced merchants can edit Clarity's Liquid files directly via Online Store → Themes → Edit Code. Click a file to open it read-only, then click Edit file to fork it. Your changes are saved to your store and persist independently of Cartly platform updates. See Using the Theme Code Editor for full instructions.

\n\n

Switching Back to Another Theme

Go to Online Store → Themes, find your previous theme in the Library section, and click Publish. Your Clarity customisations are preserved in the library — you can re-publish Clarity at any time and your settings and section content will still be there.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.414319Z","46b938f5-b74c-469b-ae34-21a50a1cf74f","Clarity is Cartly's editorial default theme. Learn how to install it, customize colors and sections, and use the Visual Editor.","Clarity Theme | Cartly Help Center","themes-clarity-overview",250,"Clarity Theme — Overview & Getting Started","2026-10-06T07:41:11.017196Z",{"_1551":2221,"_1561":2225,"_1554":2226,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2227,"_1568":2228,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2229,"_1572":2230,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2231,"_1577":2232},[2222],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2223},{"_1555":2224},"

Switching Themes Without Losing Customisations

Cartly keeps each theme's settings and file customisations in a separate library entry. Switching themes does not overwrite your previous theme's work — you can switch back at any time and find everything exactly as you left it.

\n\n

Step 1 — Install the New Theme

Go to Online Store → Themes.
Click Visit Theme Store and find the theme you want.
Click Add to Library. The theme installs in the background and appears in your Theme Library once ready.

\n\n

Step 2 — Preview Before Publishing

Click Preview on the new theme to see how your products, collections, and pages look in the new design. The preview uses your live store data — products, images, and content — so you can assess the fit without touching your live storefront.

\n\n

Step 3 — Publish the New Theme

When you are satisfied with the preview, click Publish. Your storefront switches immediately. The previous theme remains in the Library in its last state — click Publish on it at any time to switch back.

\n\n

What is Preserved Per Theme?

Design token settings (colors, fonts, spacing) — stored per theme library entry.
Section content (text, images, visibility) — stored in each template's JSON and preserved per theme.
Forked (edited) Liquid files — stored as DB rows scoped to the specific theme install. Switching themes does not affect files forked in another theme.

Note: page content (CMS pages, blog posts, products, collections) is shared across themes — it lives in your shop database, not in the theme. Only presentation (layout, styles, section settings) is theme-specific.

\n\n

Can I Have Multiple Themes in the Library?

Yes. Cartly supports an unlimited number of themes in your library. Only one can be active (published) at a time, but you can install, preview, and customise any number of themes simultaneously.

\n\n

After Switching — Things to Check

Navigation menus — verify that the new theme renders your header and footer menus correctly. Go to Online Store → Navigation if adjustments are needed.
Homepage sections — the new theme may have different default homepage sections. Open the Visual Editor to add or reorder sections.
Mobile layout — use the mobile preview button in the Visual Editor to verify the mobile layout before the switch goes live.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.41827Z","67443544-0ebf-485d-81ec-9b316ae0e476","Switch between installed themes without losing your customisations. Cartly's fork-on-write model preserves your edits in each theme's library entry.","Switch Storefront Theme | Cartly Help Center","themes-switch-theme",251,"How to Switch Your Active Storefront Theme","2026-10-06T07:41:11.042139Z",{"_1551":2234,"_1561":2238,"_1554":2239,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2240,"_1568":2241,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2242,"_1572":2243,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2244,"_1577":2245},[2235],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2236},{"_1555":2237},"

Customer Account Pages Are Now Part of Your Theme

As of Cartly v1.19, the customer account section of your storefront — login, registration, account dashboard, order history, addresses, and the return request pages — is rendered by your active Liquid theme. This means these pages now match your theme's design language automatically, without any extra setup.

\n\n

Which Pages Does This Cover?

/account — customer dashboard
/account/orders — order list
/account/orders/:id — order detail
/account/addresses — address book
/account/profile — name, email, phone
/account/communication — email preferences
/account/wishlist — saved products
/account/returns — return request list
/account/returns/:id — return request detail
/account/login — login form
/account/register — registration form
/account/reset-password — password reset

\n\n

Which Themes Support This?

All seven current marketplace themes ship customer account templates: Clarity, Mono, TechPro, Minimal, Crafter, Vogue, and Linen.

\n\n

How to Customise Account Pages

Go to Online Store → Themes → Edit Code for your active theme.
In the file tree, expand the customers/ directory. You will see files like customers/login.liquid, customers/account.liquid, customers/account.orders.liquid, and so on.
Click any file to open it read-only. Click Edit file (or press ⌘E) to fork it and enable editing.
Make your changes — add branding elements, adjust layout, add extra help text — and click Save.

Your forked version is stored in your store and is not affected by Cartly platform updates. If the platform ships an update to the same template, an amber Upstream updated banner appears — you can review the diff and decide whether to sync or keep your version.

\n\n

Things You Can Customise

Add your logo or brand header above the login form.
Add trust signals (security badges, testimonials) to the registration page.
Change the layout of the account dashboard — reorder sections, add links to your policies.
Add cross-sell recommendations to the order detail page.
Translate or rephrase any label — all strings are in your theme's locales/ files and accessible via the | t filter.

\n\n

Important Notes

The customer data (name, email, orders, addresses) comes from your Cartly account — it cannot be changed in the template. Only the presentation (HTML, CSS, layout) is customisable.
Form submissions (login, register, update profile, submit return) are handled by Cartly's backend. The template controls the form layout and labels, not the submit logic.
If you revert a forked customer template to the default (via Revert to default in the code editor), Cartly restores the theme's stock version automatically.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.421227Z","a035312a-9402-415f-977e-45fc972d8f68","Customer account pages (/account, /account/orders, login, register) are now served by your active Liquid theme. Learn how to customise them in the code editor.","Customise Customer Account Pages | Cartly Help Center","account-customize-customer-pages",252,"Customising Customer Account Pages (Liquid)","2026-10-06T07:41:11.053101Z",{"_1551":2247,"_1561":2251,"_1554":2252,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2253,"_1568":2254,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2255,"_1572":2256,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2257,"_1577":2258},[2248],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2249},{"_1555":2250},"

Overview

Cart personalization lets shoppers add a personal touch to their order at the cart — a gift note, an engraving instruction, or any other custom field your storefront theme collects — and, where you offer them, choose free samples to add to their order.

Custom Cart Fields

On a theme that supports cart personalization, shoppers see fields such as a gift note or engraving instructions on the cart page. Whatever they enter is saved with their cart as they continue shopping and checking out.

Free Samples

Shoppers can pick from a small set of free samples you make available at the cart. Samples are a fulfillment instruction, not a purchasable line item — they don't need their own SKU, price, or inventory tracking.

How It Appears on the Order

Both the custom field values and the samples a shopper chose are saved onto the order alongside the rest of the order details, so your team has everything it needs when preparing and packing the shipment.

Notes

Cart personalization is a storefront theme feature — it's available on themes built to support it, such as Balm
Field values are plain text as entered by the shopper; review them before including anything directly on packaging

","2026-08-29T11:48:19.527044Z","d30e1604-62af-4ea2-add0-e9a897dda8b5","Collect custom cart fields like gift notes and let shoppers choose free samples, both carried onto the order.","Personalizing the cart and free samples | Cartly Help Center","personalizing-the-cart-and-free-samples",260,"Personalizing the cart and free samples","2026-10-06T07:41:11.268935Z",{"_1551":2260,"_1561":2264,"_1554":2265,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2266,"_1568":2267,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2268,"_1572":2269,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2270,"_1577":2271},[2261],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2262},{"_1555":2263},"

What Is Agent Commerce?

AI shopping agents — assistants like ChatGPT, Claude, and Perplexity, and the shopping tools built on top of them — are starting to browse and buy on a shopper's behalf. Agent Commerce makes your storefront easy for those agents to read: a machine-readable summary of your store, richer product data on every page, and a simple way for an agent to look up your products, prices, and stock status.

Nothing about how your storefront looks or works for human shoppers changes. Agent Commerce adds a second, machine-readable layer alongside your normal storefront pages.

What It Does

Publishes a small discovery file describing your store, so an agent knows it found a real online store and where to look next
Adds richer, more complete product information (price, availability, SKU, ratings) to the structured data already embedded in your product pages for search engines
Lets an agent look up your products, prices, and availability directly, without needing to sign in or hold an API key

Turning It On or Off

Agent Commerce is on by default for every store — there's nothing to set up. To review or change it, go to Settings → Agent Commerce in your admin.

Turning the toggle off opts your store out of the AI-agent-specific surface: the discovery file reports your store as not agent-ready, agents are asked not to crawl your storefront, and the anonymous catalog lookup stops responding. Your product pages themselves are untouched.

What Opting Out Does Not Change

Your search engine indexing and SEO are unaffected — Google and other search engines keep working exactly as before
The rich product data on your storefront pages stays in place; only the AI-agent-specific lookup and discovery file turn off
Nothing about your storefront's appearance or normal checkout flow changes either way

What Agents Can See

Only information that's already public on your storefront: product titles, descriptions, images, prices, availability (in stock / low stock / out of stock, never exact counts), and your published collections and pages. No customer data, no order data, and no admin data are ever exposed.

Technical Details

For the exact endpoints, request parameters, and example responses — useful if you or a developer are building or debugging an integration — see the Agent Commerce API guide in the Developer Portal.

","2026-09-01T07:03:30.089428Z","7b374f3a-81bf-40b0-a413-47de9dd548f5","What Agent Commerce is, where the on/off toggle lives, and what opting out does (and doesn't) change.","Letting AI shopping agents read your store | Cartly Help Center","letting-ai-shopping-agents-read-your-store",270,"Letting AI shopping agents read your store","2026-10-06T07:41:11.27626Z",{"_1551":2273,"_1561":2277,"_1554":2278,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2279,"_1568":2280,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2281,"_1572":2282,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2283,"_1577":2284},[2274],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2275},{"_1555":2276},"

What Atrium is for

Atrium is a light-mode storefront theme for furniture and interior objects, where a product's measurements are part of the sale. It shows a dimension strip on every card, a 1:20 plan view and full spec tables on the product page, and lets shoppers filter by width, seat height, material and lead time.

Install and preview

Open the Atrium listing in the Theme Store and choose Install.
Preview it on your storefront before publishing — your current live theme is not changed until you publish Atrium.
When you're happy, publish Atrium as your live theme.

Set it up

Dimensions — add width, depth, height, seat height and weight to your products so the dimension strip, key-spec band and plan view fill in.
Navigation, hero and rooms — edit each section in the visual editor; every section has its own settings.
Language & currency — Atrium shows a language and currency picker; set your default language and currency in the theme settings.
Colours & type — the palette and radii are theme settings under Colors and Layout.

Works well with

Enable Agent Commerce and Loyalty Points to get more out of your store.

","2026-09-05T12:28:10.266277Z","ae3ec84d-6c0b-4ee7-8563-1e3d3412a0a9","How to install, preview and set up Atrium — the furniture & interior storefront theme — from the Cartly Theme Store.","Setting up the Atrium theme | Cartly Help Center","setting-up-the-atrium-theme",280,"Setting up the Atrium theme","2026-10-06T07:41:11.292971Z",{"_1544":2286,"_1546":2287,"_1548":2288},"marketing","Marketing & Discounts",[2289,2300,2311,2323,2334,2346,2358,2369,2382,2393,2405,2417],{"_1551":2290,"_1561":2294,"_1554":2295,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2296,"_1570":2286,"_1544":2297,"_1572":1573,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2298,"_1577":2299},[2291],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2292},{"_1555":2293},"

Setting Up Discounts

Cartly's discount engine supports multiple discount types with flexible conditions and limits to run promotions effectively.

\n\n

Discount Types

Percentage — A percentage off the order or specific items (e.g., 20% off)
Fixed Amount — A fixed monetary discount (e.g., $10 off)
Free Shipping — Waives the shipping cost for qualifying orders

\n\n

Creating a Discount

Navigate to Discounts in the sidebar and click Create Discount. Fill in:

Code — The discount code customers enter at checkout (e.g., SUMMER20). Leave blank for automatic discounts that apply without a code.
Type — Select percentage, fixed amount, or free shipping
Value — The discount amount (percentage or cents)
Applies to — Entire order, specific collections, or specific products

\n\n

Conditions

Add conditions to control when the discount can be used:

Minimum order amount — The cart must reach a minimum total before the discount applies
Minimum quantity — A minimum number of items must be in the cart
Customer groups — Restrict the discount to specific customer groups (e.g., VIP, Wholesale)
Date range — Set start and end dates for time-limited promotions

\n\n

Usage Limits

Total uses — Maximum number of times the discount can be used across all customers
Uses per customer — Maximum number of times a single customer can use the discount
One per order — Whether the discount can be combined with other discounts

\n\n

Automatic Discounts

Discounts without a code are applied automatically at checkout when conditions are met. Use automatic discounts for ongoing promotions like \"Free shipping on orders over $50\" or \"10% off for VIP customers\".

\n\n

Monitoring Discount Usage

On the discount detail page, view usage statistics: total uses, total discount amount given, and a list of orders that used the discount. This helps you measure the effectiveness of your promotions.

\n\n

Deactivating Discounts

Set a discount's status to inactive to stop it from being used. Inactive discounts are not deleted — they remain in your records for reference. You can reactivate a discount at any time.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.209683Z","645f4a4b-47ac-4d30-8b40-27d0d3c92e51","Creating Discounts | Cartly Help Center","creating-discounts","Creating Discounts","2026-10-06T07:41:10.433149Z",{"_1551":2301,"_1561":2305,"_1554":2306,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2307,"_1570":2286,"_1544":2308,"_1572":1600,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2309,"_1577":2310},[2302],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2303},{"_1555":2304},"

Working with Gift Cards

Gift cards allow your customers to purchase store credit that can be redeemed at checkout. They are a great way to boost sales and attract new customers.

\n\n

Creating Gift Cards

Navigate to Products → Gift Cards and click Create Gift Card. Configure:

Initial balance — The gift card value in your store currency (e.g., $25, $50, $100)
Recipient email — Optionally send the gift card directly to a recipient via email
Note — An optional personal message from the sender
Expiration date — Set an optional expiry date. Leave blank for no expiration.

\n\n

Gift Card Codes

Each gift card receives a unique alphanumeric code (e.g., GIFT-ABCD-1234-EFGH). The code is displayed to the customer after purchase and included in the email if a recipient is specified. For security, only the last four characters are shown in the admin panel.

\n\n

Selling Gift Cards on Your Storefront

Gift cards can be sold as products on your storefront. Create a gift card product with different denomination variants ($25, $50, $100). When a customer purchases a gift card product, Cartly automatically generates and emails the gift card code.

\n\n

Redeeming Gift Cards

At checkout, customers enter their gift card code in the payment section. Cartly validates the code, checks the remaining balance, and applies the available amount to the order. If the order total exceeds the gift card balance, the customer pays the difference with another payment method.

\n\n

Partial Redemption

Gift cards support partial use. If a $50 gift card is used on a $30 order, $20 remains on the card for future purchases. The remaining balance is shown to the customer on the checkout success page.

\n\n

Gift Card Transactions

Every gift card has a transaction history showing all activity: initial creation, each redemption with the order number and amount, and any manual adjustments. Navigate to a gift card's detail page to view its complete history.

\n\n

Managing Gift Cards

In the admin panel, you can:

View all gift cards with their status (active, redeemed, expired)
Adjust a gift card's balance manually (with a reason note)
Disable a gift card to prevent further use
Resend the gift card email to the recipient

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.213945Z","095f8839-dff1-458b-b1fa-63a10b627dd1","Gift Cards | Cartly Help Center","gift-cards","Gift Cards","2026-10-06T07:41:10.44217Z",{"_1551":2312,"_1561":2316,"_1554":2317,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2318,"_1568":2319,"_1570":2286,"_1544":2320,"_1572":1612,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2321,"_1577":2322},[2313],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2314},{"_1555":2315},"

What Is Conversion Tracking?

A Google Ads conversion tag fires on the order confirmation (Thank You) page after a customer completes a purchase. It reports the order back to Google so you can see which ads and keywords are driving sales.

Cartly has a dedicated injection point for order-confirmation scripts — separate from site-wide scripts — so your conversion tag fires exactly once per successful purchase and never on error pages.

\n\n

Where to Add the Tag

Go to Preferences → Checkout / Order Status Scripts. This section is specifically for code that should run on the order confirmation page. Do not use Settings → Custom Scripts for conversion tracking — that section fires on every page of your storefront, which would inflate your conversion counts.

\n\n

How to Add a Google Ads Tag

In your Google Ads account, go to Tools → Measurement → Conversions.
Create a new conversion action or open an existing one. Choose Website as the source.
In the tag setup, select Use Google Tag Manager or Install the tag yourself. If installing yourself, copy the Global site tag snippet — it usually contains two <script> blocks.
In your Cartly admin, go to Preferences → Checkout / Order Status Scripts.
Paste the Google Ads snippet into the Head Script field.
Click Save.

Cartly automatically handles the CSP (Content Security Policy) requirements — you do not need to add any nonce attributes to the script tags.

\n\n

Multi-Script Snippets

Google Ads typically gives you two <script> tags to paste (an async loader script and an inline configuration block). Cartly executes both correctly — paste the full snippet as-is without splitting it.

\n\n

Testing Your Tag

Complete a test order on your storefront.
On the Thank You page, open browser DevTools → Network tab and look for a request to googleadservices.com or googletagmanager.com.
In Google Ads, use Tools → Tag Diagnostics to verify the tag is firing.

\n\n

Other Conversion Tracking Platforms

The same injection point works for:

Facebook Pixel — paste the base Pixel code + Purchase event in the Head or Body Script field.
TikTok Pixel — paste the TikTok Pixel snippet in the Head Script field.
Bing Ads / Microsoft Advertising — paste the UET tag in the Head Script field.
Snapchat Pixel, Pinterest Tag, Twitter Pixel — all work the same way.

See also: Add a chat widget or GTM to your storefront (site-wide scripts)

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.443696Z","e95b7dc3-4795-465a-a889-ff9f1d887eae","How to add a Google Ads conversion tag to your Cartly order confirmation page — no code editor or theme file changes required.","Add Google Ads Conversion Tracking | Cartly Help Center","add-google-ads-conversion-tracking","Add Google Ads Conversion Tracking","2026-10-06T07:41:11.091227Z",{"_1551":2324,"_1561":2328,"_1554":2329,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2330,"_1570":2286,"_1544":2331,"_1572":1612,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2332,"_1577":2333},[2325],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2326},{"_1555":2327},"

Customizing Email Templates

Cartly sends transactional emails at key points in the customer journey. You can customize these emails to match your brand and messaging.

\n\n

Transactional Emails

The following emails are sent automatically:

Order Confirmation — Sent after a successful purchase. Includes order number, line items, totals, and shipping address.
Shipping Confirmation — Sent when an order is fulfilled. Includes tracking number and carrier link.
Refund Notification — Sent when a refund is processed. Includes refund amount and reason.
Account Welcome — Sent when a customer creates an account.
Email Verification — Sent to verify the customer's email address.
Password Reset — Sent when a customer requests a password reset.
Abandoned Cart — Sent to customers who left items in their cart without completing checkout.
Gift Card — Sent when a gift card is purchased or sent to a recipient.

\n\n

Customizing Templates

Navigate to Settings → Email Templates to view and edit all templates. Each template has:

Subject line — The email subject. Supports dynamic variables like {{order_number}} and {{store_name}}.
Body — HTML email content. Uses a template engine with variables for dynamic content.
Preview — See how the email looks with sample data before saving.

\n\n

Template Variables

Common variables available across templates:

{{store_name}} — Your store name
{{customer_name}} — The customer's first name
{{order_number}} — The order number
{{order_total}} — The formatted order total
{{tracking_url}} — Shipment tracking link
{{store_url}} — Your store URL

\n\n

Email Delivery

Cartly supports SMTP and Amazon SES for email delivery. Configure your email provider in Settings → Email. We recommend using a dedicated email service for better deliverability and tracking.

\n\n

Testing Emails

Use the Send Test button on any template to send a preview to your own email address. This lets you verify formatting, links, and dynamic content before going live.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.216332Z","c2dc2ac9-1203-4202-9d2d-11e61aedc864","Email Templates | Cartly Help Center","email-templates","Email Templates","2026-10-06T07:41:10.451724Z",{"_1551":2335,"_1561":2339,"_1554":2340,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2341,"_1568":2342,"_1570":2286,"_1544":2343,"_1572":2100,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2344,"_1577":2345},[2336],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2337},{"_1555":2338},"

Site-Wide Scripts vs Conversion Scripts

Cartly has two separate places for merchant scripts:

Settings → Custom Scripts — fires on every Liquid storefront page (home, product, collection, cart, blog, search, account). Use this for GTM, GA4 site-wide config, chat widgets, and session recording tools.
Preferences → Checkout / Order Status Scripts — fires only on the order confirmation page. Use this for purchase conversion events (Google Ads, Facebook Pixel). See Add Google Ads conversion tracking.

This article covers Settings → Custom Scripts.

\n\n

Add Google Tag Manager

In Google Tag Manager, click your container and go to Admin → Install Google Tag Manager.
Copy the head snippet (the first block — paste it before </head>).
Copy the body snippet (the second block — paste it after <body>).
In your Cartly admin, go to Settings → Custom Scripts.
Paste the head snippet into the Head Script field.
Paste the body snippet into the Body Script field.
Click Save.

GTM will load on every page of your storefront. You can then configure all your tags, triggers, and variables within GTM without touching Cartly settings again.

\n\n

Add a Live Chat Widget

Live chat providers (Intercom, Crisp, Tidio, Zendesk, Freshchat) give you a small JavaScript snippet to add to your site. Paste it into the Body Script field in Settings → Custom Scripts. The chat widget will appear on every storefront page.

Example (Intercom):

<script>\n  window.intercomSettings = { app_id: \"YOUR_APP_ID\" };\n  (function(){var w=window;var ic=w.Intercom;if(typeof ic===\"function\"){...}})();\n</script>

Paste the full snippet — Cartly handles CSP nonce injection automatically.

\n\n

Add GA4 or Any Analytics Script

Get your script snippet from the analytics provider.
Go to Settings → Custom Scripts.
Paste the snippet into the Head Script field (most analytics scripts load from <head>).
Save.

\n\n

CSP and Security

Cartly storefronts use a Content Security Policy to protect your customers. Scripts that are not on the allowlist would normally be blocked by the browser. Cartly automatically adds a security nonce to every <script> tag you paste in the Custom Scripts fields — your scripts execute correctly without any extra steps from you.

\n\n

What Pages Are Covered?

Site-wide scripts fire on all pages served by the Liquid rendering engine:

Home page
Product pages
Collection pages
Cart page
Blog listing and article pages
Search results
CMS pages
Login, register, and account pages

The React-rendered checkout and thank-you pages are not covered by site-wide scripts. Use Preferences → Checkout / Order Status Scripts for conversion tracking on the thank-you page.

\n\n

Notes

Scripts load in the order head → body — head scripts run before the page is fully rendered; body scripts run after.
If you add two or more script tags to the same field, all of them will execute.
Platform administrators can disable custom scripts globally. If the editor shows \"Custom scripts are disabled by the platform\", contact your platform provider.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.44718Z","25eccebf-fee2-40d3-b034-91f0dc259144","How to add Google Tag Manager, a live chat widget, or any site-wide tracking script to every page of your Cartly storefront — without editing theme files.","Add a Chat Widget or GTM to Your Storefront | Cartly Help Center","add-a-chat-widget-or-gtm-to-your-storefront","Add a Chat Widget or GTM to Your Storefront","2026-10-06T07:41:11.099601Z",{"_1551":2347,"_1561":2351,"_1554":2352,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2353,"_1568":2354,"_1570":2286,"_1544":2355,"_1572":2112,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2356,"_1577":2357},[2348],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2349},{"_1555":2350},"

What Loyalty Points Does

Loyalty Points is a free, built-in app that rewards repeat customers. Signed-in shoppers earn points every time they pay for an order and can redeem those points for a discount code on their next purchase. There is no third-party service to connect and no extra cost — you install it from the App Store and turn it on.

Points are only earned by customers who are signed in to an account. Guests who check out without an account do not earn points.

\n\n

Turning It On

Open the App Store from your admin and install Loyalty Points (it's free).
Go to Apps → Loyalty Points to open the settings.
Set your rates (below), make sure the program is enabled, and save.

\n\n

How Earning Works

When a customer pays for an order, they automatically earn points based on the order's item subtotal — the value of the products after any discounts, not counting shipping or tax. The number of points is your earn rate multiplied by each whole dollar of that subtotal (rounded down).

If an order is later refunded or cancelled, the points earned on it are removed proportionally — a full refund removes all of them, a partial refund removes a matching share. This happens on its own; you don't need to adjust anything by hand.

\n\n

How Redeeming Works

From their account page, a customer converts points into a one-time discount code. The code is personal — it only works for the customer who created it and can't be forwarded to someone else — and it expires after the number of days you set. Customers can redeem once they reach your minimum, in whole-dollar amounts.

\n\n

Setting Your Rates

You control four numbers under Apps → Loyalty Points:

Points earned per $1 — how many points a customer earns for each dollar of subtotal.
Points needed for $1 off — how many points equal one dollar of discount when redeeming.
Minimum points to redeem — the smallest balance a customer can cash in.
Code expiry (days) — how long a redeemed discount code stays valid.

Because the earn rate and the redeem rate are set separately, you decide the effective reward. For example, earning 10 points per $1 while charging 100 points per $1 off is the same as giving 10% back.

\n\n

Showing the Balance on Your Storefront

Add the Loyalty Points widget to your customer account page from the theme editor so shoppers always see their current balance and a redeem button. The widget only appears for signed-in customers.

\n\n

Adjusting a Customer's Points by Hand

On the Apps → Loyalty Points page you can add or remove points for an individual customer — useful for support, a goodwill gesture, or correcting a mistake. Enter the customer's email, the number of points to add or subtract, and a short note. Every manual adjustment is recorded in your audit log.

","2026-09-01T07:42:34.657902Z","0a376948-5cf6-4f62-bfc9-03149d379137","Set up the free Loyalty Points app so signed-in customers earn points on paid orders and redeem them for a personal discount code, with rates you control.","Rewarding Customers with Loyalty Points | Cartly Help Center","rewarding-customers-with-loyalty-points","Rewarding Customers with Loyalty Points","2026-10-06T07:41:11.284673Z",{"_1551":2359,"_1561":2363,"_1554":2364,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2365,"_1570":2286,"_1544":2366,"_1572":1624,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2367,"_1577":2368},[2360],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2361},{"_1555":2362},"

Managing Product Reviews

Product reviews build trust with potential customers and improve your store's SEO through user-generated content.

\n\n

How Reviews Work

After purchasing a product, customers can leave a review from the product page or their account. Each review includes a star rating (1-5) and optional text content. Reviews are linked to the customer's verified purchase.

\n\n

Review Moderation

By default, reviews require approval before they are visible on your storefront. Navigate to Products → Reviews to see pending reviews. For each review, you can:

Approve — Publish the review on the product page
Reject — Hide the review permanently
Reply — Post a public response from your store (great for addressing concerns or thanking customers)

\n\n

Auto-Approval

If you prefer not to moderate every review, you can enable auto-approval in settings. Auto-approved reviews are published immediately. You can still remove inappropriate reviews after the fact.

\n\n

Review Display

Approved reviews appear on the product page in the Reviews section. The display includes:

Average rating with star visualization
Total number of reviews
Individual reviews with customer name, date, rating, and text
Your replies (if any)

\n\n

Reviews and SEO

Cartly adds structured data (JSON-LD) for product reviews, which can result in star ratings appearing in Google search results. This rich snippet increases click-through rates from search results to your product pages.

\n\n

Review Notifications

Receive email notifications when new reviews are submitted. This helps you stay on top of moderation and respond quickly to customer feedback.

\n\n

Encouraging Reviews

Send a follow-up email a few days after delivery asking customers to review their purchase. This can be configured as part of your email automation workflow.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.219318Z","f1210592-7d16-45e1-ab4c-6852e2293589","Product Reviews | Cartly Help Center","reviews","Product Reviews","2026-10-06T07:41:10.457417Z",{"_1551":2370,"_1561":2374,"_1554":2375,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2376,"_1568":2377,"_1570":2286,"_1544":2378,"_1572":2379,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2380,"_1577":2381},[2371],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2372},{"_1555":2373},"

Overview

Product reviews let customers share their experience. They build social proof, improve SEO, and help shoppers make decisions.

Showing or Hiding Reviews

Go to Admin → Products → Reviews
Find Show reviews on storefront and toggle it on or off
Save — no theme editing required

Works across all Cartly themes: Vogue, TechPro, Crafter, Minimal.

Review Moderation

By default, reviews require approval before appearing on your storefront.

Go to Admin → Products → Reviews
Pending reviews appear in the Pending tab
Click Approve to publish or Reject to hide

Auto-Approval

Enable Auto-approve new reviews in Reviews Settings to publish reviews immediately.

Review Display

Average star rating, total review count
Individual reviews with name, date, rating, text, and your replies

Reviews and SEO

Cartly adds JSON-LD structured data for reviews, enabling star ratings in Google search results.

Plan Requirements

The toggle and basic moderation are available on all plans. Full functionality (review request emails, media uploads) requires the Pro plan or the Reviews app from the App Store.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.37763Z","6dfee391-531d-4530-98d1-e8c1376f5128","Enable, disable, and moderate product reviews on your storefront.","Product Reviews Storefront | Cartly Help Center","product-reviews-storefront",45,"Managing Product Reviews on Your Storefront","2026-10-06T07:41:10.935541Z",{"_1551":2383,"_1561":2387,"_1554":2388,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2389,"_1570":2286,"_1544":2390,"_1572":1636,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2391,"_1577":2392},[2384],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2385},{"_1555":2386},"

Building Your Email List

Cartly includes a built-in newsletter subscriber management system to help you collect and manage email subscribers.

\n\n

Subscriber Collection

Subscribers can sign up through several touchpoints on your storefront:

Footer form — The theme's footer includes an optional newsletter signup form
Popup form — Configure a timed or scroll-triggered popup (if supported by your theme sections)
Checkout opt-in — Customers can opt in to marketing emails during checkout
Dedicated page — Create a newsletter landing page using the page builder

\n\n

Managing Subscribers

Navigate to Marketing → Newsletter to view all subscribers. The list shows each subscriber's email, subscription date, and status (active or unsubscribed). Use the search bar to find specific subscribers.

\n\n

Subscriber Status

Active — The subscriber is opted in and can receive marketing emails
Unsubscribed — The subscriber has opted out. They will not receive marketing emails. The record is kept for compliance.

Subscribers can unsubscribe by clicking the unsubscribe link in any marketing email, or by contacting your store directly.

\n\n

Exporting Subscribers

Export your subscriber list as a CSV for use with external email marketing platforms like Mailchimp, Klaviyo, or SendGrid. The export includes email, status, and subscription date.

\n\n

Email Campaigns

Cartly includes a basic email campaign feature for sending newsletters to your subscriber list. Navigate to Marketing → Campaigns to create a campaign:

Choose a subject line and sender name
Compose the email body using the rich text editor
Preview and send a test email
Send to all active subscribers or a filtered segment

\n\n

Compliance

All marketing emails include a mandatory unsubscribe link at the bottom. Cartly respects unsubscribe requests immediately. This compliance with CAN-SPAM and GDPR regulations protects your store's reputation and email deliverability.

\n\n

Double Opt-In

Enable double opt-in to require subscribers to confirm their email address via a confirmation link. This ensures higher-quality subscribers and reduces spam signups.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.223072Z","4e9de355-32fc-4fb8-82af-3d36c8a8095c","Newsletter Management | Cartly Help Center","newsletter","Newsletter Management","2026-10-06T07:41:10.464106Z",{"_1551":2394,"_1561":2398,"_1554":2399,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2400,"_1568":2401,"_1570":2286,"_1544":2402,"_1572":1766,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2403,"_1577":2404},[2395],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2396},{"_1555":2397},"

Overview

Cartly's discount engine supports advanced promotion types beyond basic percentage and fixed-amount codes. This guide covers BOGO, auto-apply discounts, and product/collection scoping.

\n\n

BOGO (Buy One Get One)

BOGO discounts reward customers who buy a qualifying quantity of items. Go to Admin → Discounts → New Discount and set the type to BOGO.

BOGO Configuration

Buy Quantity — The number of items a customer must add to the cart to qualify
Get Quantity — The number of items the customer receives at the discounted price
Get Discount — The discount on the \"get\" items: 100% = free, 50% = half price, etc.

Cartly applies the BOGO discount to the cheapest qualifying items first. For example, \"Buy 2 Get 1 Free\" applied to a cart with items priced at $30, $20, and $15 will make the $15 item free.

\n\n

Auto-Apply Discounts

Auto-apply discounts activate automatically when a cart meets the conditions — no discount code required.

Create a discount and toggle Auto-apply to on
Set your conditions (minimum cart value, required products, etc.)
Save and activate the discount

When a customer's cart matches the conditions, the discount appears in the cart breakdown automatically. Multiple auto-apply discounts can stack if both apply.

\n\n

Product & Collection Scoping

Restrict a FIXED or PERCENT discount to specific products or collections so it only applies to eligible line items.

In the discount editor, scroll to Applies To
Choose Specific products or Specific collections
Search and add the items or collections you want to include

Line items not in the scoped list are excluded from the discount calculation even if the code is applied.

\n\n

Discount Breakdown

When multiple discounts apply to an order, Cartly returns a full breakdown showing each discount's contribution per line item. This is visible in the order detail view under Discounts Applied.

\n\n

Tips

Combine BOGO with collection scoping to create targeted \"buy 2 shoes, get 1 accessory free\" promotions
Use auto-apply with a minimum order value to replace manual coupon campaigns
Check the Usage tab on any discount to see how many times it has been applied

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.332788Z","48a1094a-7538-4839-9708-0ff5cea871b2","Set up Buy One Get One discounts, auto-apply promotions, and scope discounts to specific products or collections.","Advanced Discounts | Cartly Help Center","advanced-discounts","Advanced Discounts: BOGO, Auto-Apply & Scoping","2026-10-06T07:41:10.844799Z",{"_1551":2406,"_1561":2410,"_1554":2411,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2412,"_1568":2413,"_1570":2286,"_1544":2414,"_1572":1779,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2415,"_1577":2416},[2407],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2408},{"_1555":2409},"

Overview

Store Credit is a balance associated with a customer account. Customers earn credit through refunds, promotions, or manual adjustments. They can spend it at checkout like a payment method.

\n\n

Viewing a Customer's Credit Balance

Go to Admin → Customers and open a customer profile
Find the Store Credit section — it shows the current balance and a full transaction ledger (credits, debits, dates, and reasons)

\n\n

Manual Credit Adjustments

You can add or subtract store credit manually:

Open the customer profile
Click Adjust Store Credit
Enter the amount (positive to add, negative to subtract) and an audit note
Save — the ledger is updated immediately

\n\n

Refunding to Store Credit

When approving a return request (RMA), you can refund to store credit instead of the original payment method:

Go to Admin → Orders → Returns and open the return request
Click Approve
In the refund dialog, select Refund to Store Credit
Confirm — the credit is added to the customer's ledger instantly

\n\n

Customers Using Store Credit at Checkout

On the checkout page, customers with a positive store credit balance see a Use Store Credit toggle. They can apply their full balance or a partial amount. Store credit is deducted from the order total; any remaining amount is charged to their chosen payment method.

\n\n

Gift Cards

Gift cards work similarly to store credit but are issued as unique codes. Go to Admin → Discounts → Gift Cards to create and manage gift card codes. Customers redeem them at checkout in the discount code field.

\n\n

Notes

Store credit balances do not expire by default. Contact support if you need an expiry policy.
All ledger entries are audited — you can see which admin performed each adjustment.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.357703Z","de3e790a-fc38-42d5-aed9-55eea2893bd7","Manage customer store credit balances, issue adjustments, accept credit at checkout, and refund to store credit.","Store Credit | Cartly Help Center","store-credit","Store Credit & Gift Card Ledger","2026-10-06T07:41:10.882087Z",{"_1551":2418,"_1561":2422,"_1554":2423,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2424,"_1568":2425,"_1570":2286,"_1544":2426,"_1572":2427,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2428,"_1577":2429},[2419],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2420},{"_1555":2421},"

Overview

Abandoned Cart Recovery automatically emails customers who added items to their cart but did not complete checkout. Instead of a single reminder, it sends a 3-step email drip, and the final message can carry a real, one-time discount code to bring shoppers back.

\n\n

Enabling Abandoned Cart Recovery

Go to Admin → Apps → Abandoned Cart Recovery
Toggle Enable abandoned cart recovery to on
Save

\n\n

Requirements

Email must be configured — Go to Settings → Email and connect your email provider before recovery emails can be sent
Customer email must be known — The customer must have entered their email during checkout or be a registered account holder

\n\n

The 3-Step Drip

Once a cart is marked abandoned, Cartly sends up to three emails, spaced out over a few days:

Step 1 — a first reminder shortly after the cart is abandoned
Step 2 — a follow-up nudge about a day later
Step 3 — a final message that can include a discount incentive

Before each step is sent, Cartly checks whether the cart is still abandoned. If the shopper already completed checkout or the cart was cleared, the remaining steps are skipped automatically — nobody gets a reminder for an order they already placed.

\n\n

Adding a Discount Incentive

Turn on Enable incentive to have the final drip email carry a real, one-time discount code — a percentage or fixed amount off, with an optional minimum cart value and expiry window, all configurable from the same settings page. The code is minted specifically for that shopper's cart and behaves exactly like any other Cartly discount: once it's redeemed, you'll see its status change to Used up on the Discounts page. The incentive is off by default — installing the app never hands out discounts on its own.

\n\n

Avoiding Over-Messaging

Each abandoned cart runs through the drip at most once. A shopper who recovers their cart, places an order, or unsubscribes from marketing emails is excluded from any remaining steps, so recovery emails stay useful instead of becoming spam.

\n\n

Monitoring Recovery

Recovery activity is visible in the Analytics → Conversion Funnel. Recovered carts count as completed checkout events, improving your funnel conversion rate.

\n\n

Notes

The recovery link in every drip email restores the exact cart contents
Customers who have unsubscribed from marketing emails are excluded from the drip
To customize the wording of each drip email, go to Admin → Settings → Email Templates

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.364839Z","74fd7bdd-8959-48ed-93bc-76251d229ac1","Automatically send a 3-step recovery email drip — with an optional discount incentive — to customers who left items in their cart.","Abandoned Cart Recovery | Cartly Help Center","abandoned-cart-recovery",110,"Abandoned Cart Recovery","2026-10-06T07:41:10.894951Z",{"_1544":2431,"_1546":2432,"_1548":2433},"payments-billing","Payments & Billing",[2434,2445,2456,2467,2478,2490,2502,2513,2525,2538,2550],{"_1551":2435,"_1561":2439,"_1554":2440,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2441,"_1570":2431,"_1544":2442,"_1572":1573,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2443,"_1577":2444},[2436],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2437},{"_1555":2438},"

Connecting Stripe Payments

Cartly uses Stripe as its payment processor. This guide walks you through connecting your Stripe account to start accepting payments.

\n\n

Prerequisites

You need a Stripe account. If you do not have one, create it at stripe.com. Stripe is available in 46+ countries and supports all major credit and debit cards.

\n\n

Connecting Your Account

Navigate to Settings → Payments in your Cartly admin
Click Connect Stripe
You will be redirected to Stripe to authorize the connection
Log in to your Stripe account and approve the connection
You are redirected back to Cartly with the connection active

\n\n

Test Mode vs. Live Mode

Stripe offers two modes:

Test mode — Process simulated payments with test card numbers. No real money moves. Use this to verify your checkout flow works correctly.
Live mode — Process real payments with real cards. Enable this when you are ready to sell.

You can switch between modes in Settings → Payments. We strongly recommend testing thoroughly in test mode before going live.

\n\n

Test Card Numbers

In test mode, use these Stripe test cards:

4242 4242 4242 4242 — Successful payment
4000 0000 0000 3220 — Requires 3D Secure authentication
4000 0000 0000 9995 — Payment declined (insufficient funds)

Use any future expiry date and any three-digit CVC.

\n\n

Webhook Configuration

Cartly automatically configures Stripe webhooks when you connect your account. Webhooks notify Cartly of payment events (successful charges, refunds, disputes) in real time. The webhook endpoint is /webhooks/stripe and is verified using Stripe's signature verification.

\n\n

Payment Methods

Through Stripe, your store can accept:

Credit and debit cards (Visa, Mastercard, American Express, Discover)
Apple Pay and Google Pay (automatically enabled on supported devices)
Additional payment methods based on your Stripe account settings

\n\n

Payouts

Stripe deposits your earnings to your linked bank account on a rolling basis (typically 2 business days). You can view payout schedules and history in your Stripe dashboard.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.226794Z","1db2c6bd-f6d9-4b43-af96-b97f39c47a35","Stripe Setup | Cartly Help Center","stripe-setup","Stripe Setup","2026-10-06T07:41:10.470654Z",{"_1551":2446,"_1561":2450,"_1554":2451,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2452,"_1570":2431,"_1544":2453,"_1572":1600,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2454,"_1577":2455},[2447],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2448},{"_1555":2449},"

Cartly Subscription Plans

Cartly offers tiered subscription plans to match your business needs. All plans include a 7-day free trial.

\n\n

Available Plans

Starter ($19/mo) — 3 staff accounts, 1,000 products, 50K AI chars/mo, 0% transaction fee
Growth ($49/mo) — 5 staff accounts, 5,000 products, 250K AI chars/mo, 0% transaction fee
Pro ($199/mo) — 15 staff, unlimited products, 1M AI chars/mo, 0% transaction fee
Enterprise ($699/mo) — Unlimited staff, unlimited products, unlimited AI, 0% transaction fee

\n\n

Managing Your Subscription

Navigate to Settings → Billing to view your current plan, usage, and billing history. From here you can:

View your current plan and billing cycle
Upgrade or downgrade your plan
Update payment method
View invoice history and download invoices

\n\n

Upgrading

When you upgrade, the new plan takes effect immediately. You are charged a prorated amount for the remainder of the current billing cycle. All new features and limits are available right away.

\n\n

Downgrading

Downgrades take effect at the end of your current billing cycle. If your store exceeds the new plan's limits (e.g., too many products), you will need to reduce your usage before the downgrade activates.

\n\n

Free Trial

New stores receive a 7-day free trial on any plan. During the trial, all features are available. No credit card is required to start. At the end of the trial, add a payment method to continue or your store will be paused.

\n\n

Transaction Fees

All Cartly plans include 0% transaction fees. You keep 100% of your sales revenue — we only charge the monthly subscription fee.

\n\n

Billing Issues

If a payment fails, Cartly retries up to three times over seven days. You will receive email notifications for each retry. If all retries fail, your store enters a grace period. Update your payment method in Settings → Billing to resolve billing issues.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.230731Z","3c4ec094-14e3-4c19-a8c8-9d80c32b0e40","Subscription Plans | Cartly Help Center","subscription-plans","Subscription Plans","2026-10-06T07:41:10.477022Z",{"_1551":2457,"_1561":2461,"_1554":2462,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2463,"_1570":2431,"_1544":2464,"_1572":1612,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2465,"_1577":2466},[2458],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2459},{"_1555":2460},"

Multi-Currency Support

Cartly supports selling in multiple currencies, allowing you to display prices in your customers' preferred currency.

\n\n

Setting Your Base Currency

Your base currency is set during store creation and is used for all internal price storage. All product prices, order totals, and reports use the base currency. Navigate to Settings → General to view your base currency.

\n\n

Enabling Additional Currencies

Go to Settings → Currencies to enable additional currencies for your storefront. When a customer visits your store, prices are displayed in their selected currency based on the current exchange rate.

\n\n

Exchange Rates

Cartly manages exchange rates through the exchange_rate entity. Rates can be:

Automatic — Updated periodically from external rate providers
Manual — Set custom rates that you control. Useful for markets where you want fixed pricing.

You can view and adjust exchange rates in the admin panel. Manual overrides take precedence over automatic rates.

\n\n

Price Display

When a customer selects a currency, all prices are converted from your base currency using the applicable exchange rate. The storefront shows prices in the selected currency with the correct symbol and formatting (e.g., $29.99, 27.49 EUR, 3,299 JPY).

\n\n

Checkout Currency

At checkout, the payment is processed in the currency the customer selected. Stripe handles the currency conversion on the payment side. The order is recorded in both the display currency and your base currency for accurate reporting.

\n\n

Rounding Rules

Converted prices are rounded to the appropriate number of decimal places for each currency. Most currencies use 2 decimal places, while some (like JPY) use 0. Cartly applies the correct rounding rules automatically.

\n\n

Reporting

All analytics and reports show amounts in your base currency, even for orders placed in other currencies. This ensures consistent financial reporting regardless of the currencies your customers use.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.235756Z","1d679a01-b176-4604-b77d-de9e2748f1d6","Multi-Currency | Cartly Help Center","currencies","Multi-Currency","2026-10-06T07:41:10.485374Z",{"_1551":2468,"_1561":2472,"_1554":2473,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2474,"_1570":2431,"_1544":2475,"_1572":1624,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2476,"_1577":2477},[2469],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2470},{"_1555":2471},"

Configuring Taxes

Cartly supports flexible tax configuration to handle different tax requirements across regions.

\n\n

Tax Rates

Navigate to Settings → Taxes to configure tax rates. Each tax rate specifies:

Name — A label for the tax (e.g., \"Sales Tax\", \"VAT\", \"GST\")
Rate — The percentage to apply (e.g., 10.0 for 10%)
Country — The country where this rate applies
State/Province — Optionally restrict to a specific state or province
Priority — When multiple rates apply, priority determines the order of calculation

\n\n

Tax-Inclusive vs. Tax-Exclusive

Cartly supports both pricing models:

Tax-exclusive — Prices shown to customers do not include tax. Tax is calculated and added at checkout. Common in the US and Canada.
Tax-inclusive — Prices shown already include tax. The tax portion is extracted at checkout for reporting. Common in the EU, UK, and Australia.

Set your preference in Settings → Taxes. This applies store-wide.

\n\n

Tax Calculation

During checkout, Cartly determines the applicable tax rate based on the customer's shipping address. The tax rate for the matching country (and optionally state) is applied to the taxable items in the order. Shipping costs can be configured as taxable or non-taxable.

\n\n

Tax-Exempt Products

Some products may be tax-exempt (e.g., certain food items, clothing in some jurisdictions). You can mark individual products as tax-exempt on the product edit page. Tax-exempt products are excluded from tax calculations.

\n\n

Tax Reporting

Cartly tracks tax collected on every order. View tax reports in the admin analytics section to see total tax collected by rate, by country, and by time period. This data is essential for filing tax returns with your local tax authority.

\n\n

Tax on International Orders

When selling internationally, different tax rates may apply based on the customer's country. Create tax rates for each country you sell to. Cartly automatically applies the correct rate based on the shipping destination.

\n\n

Important Notice

Tax regulations vary by jurisdiction and change frequently. Cartly provides the tools to configure and collect taxes, but you are responsible for determining the correct tax rates and filing requirements for your business. Consult a tax professional for specific advice.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.24198Z","893f23cf-4bac-4f02-af30-c32596cd8baf","Tax Configuration | Cartly Help Center","taxes","Tax Configuration","2026-10-06T07:41:10.49768Z",{"_1551":2479,"_1561":2483,"_1554":2484,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2485,"_1568":2486,"_1570":2431,"_1544":2487,"_1572":1636,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2488,"_1577":2489},[2480],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2481},{"_1555":2482},"

Taking Payments with Your Own Stripe Account

Card payments through Cartly settle directly to your own Stripe account — never a shared platform account. You get full visibility into every charge, refund, and payout in your own Stripe Dashboard.

\n\n

Connecting your keys

Go to Settings → Payments and enable Stripe. Enter your publishable key and secret key from your Stripe Dashboard under Developers → API keys. Both are saved encrypted, and the secret key is never shown again once saved.

\n\n

Setting up the webhook

Card checkout stays hidden on your storefront until this step is complete. In your Stripe Dashboard, under Developers → Webhooks, add an endpoint using the URL shown on your Payments settings page, and subscribe it to the payment_intent.succeeded event. Copy the endpoint's signing secret back into the Webhook signing secret field in Cartly and save.

\n\n

Testing the connection

Use the Test Stripe Connection button on the Payments settings page to verify your saved secret key is valid. Save any changes to your keys before testing.

\n\n

Refunds and reconciliation

Refunds you issue from a Cartly order are processed against your own Stripe account, the same one that took the original charge. A background reconciliation job continuously checks for any successful charge whose confirmation didn't make it back to Cartly in time — for example a delayed or missed webhook — and closes out the order regardless, so a successful payment is never left stranded.

\n\n

Before you can enable payments

Email delivery must be configured first, from Settings → Email. This ensures order confirmation emails are guaranteed to work before you start accepting real charges.

","2026-08-05T19:12:33.856526Z","9e33f01b-9434-4933-89cc-ee12b9a903d3","Card payments settle directly to your own Stripe account. Connect your keys, set up the required webhook, and test your connection.","Taking Payments with Your Own Stripe Account | Cartly Help Center","taking-payments-with-your-own-stripe-account","Taking Payments with Your Own Stripe Account","2026-10-06T07:41:10.508075Z",{"_1551":2491,"_1561":2495,"_1554":2496,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2497,"_1568":2498,"_1570":2431,"_1544":2499,"_1572":1754,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2500,"_1577":2501},[2492],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2493},{"_1555":2494},"

Overview

In addition to Stripe, Cartly supports two offline payment methods: Cash on Delivery (COD) and Bank Transfer. Both are configured from Admin → Settings → Payments.

\n\n

Cash on Delivery (COD)

COD lets customers pay in cash when their order is delivered.

Enabling COD

Go to Admin → Settings → Payments
Find the Cash on Delivery section and toggle it on
Enter optional instructions (e.g. \"Please have exact change ready\")
Save

COD will appear as a payment option on your checkout page. Orders placed via COD are created immediately with a Pending payment status. Mark them as paid manually after you collect payment by opening the order and clicking Mark as Paid.

\n\n

Bank Transfer

Bank Transfer lets customers pay via direct bank transfer before their order is fulfilled.

Enabling Bank Transfer

Go to Admin → Settings → Payments
Find the Bank Transfer section and toggle it on
Enter your bank account details: IBAN, account name, bank name, and any additional instructions
Save

Your bank details and instructions are displayed to the customer after checkout and in their order confirmation email. Orders start with a Pending payment status. Mark them as paid once you confirm the bank transfer in your account.

\n\n

Processing Offline Orders

Mark as Paid — Open the order detail and click this button once you have received payment
Fulfillment — Fulfill the order after confirming payment to send shipping notifications
Cancel — Cancel unpaid orders if payment is not received within your payment window

\n\n

Notes

COD and Bank Transfer orders do not require email_configured but customers will only receive confirmation emails if your email provider is set up in Settings → Email
Both methods work alongside Stripe — customers see all available payment options at checkout

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.339635Z","c98aebfc-17ce-4502-992d-575c2e8bf70e","Enable offline payment methods — Cash on Delivery (COD) and Bank Transfer — for your Cartly store.","COD & Bank Transfer | Cartly Help Center","cod-bank-transfer","Cash on Delivery & Bank Transfer Payments","2026-10-06T07:41:10.853645Z",{"_1551":2503,"_1561":2507,"_1554":2508,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2509,"_1570":2431,"_1544":2510,"_1572":1754,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2511,"_1577":2512},[2504],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2505},{"_1555":2506},"

Cross-Border Selling with Markets

Cartly's Markets feature lets you sell internationally by displaying prices in your customers' local currency and showing content in their language. You define markets — groups of countries that share a currency and language — and Cartly automatically shows the right prices to each visitor.

\n\n

What Is a Market?

A market is a group of countries that your store serves under the same currency and language settings. For example, you might create a \"Europe\" market covering Germany, France, and Austria, using EUR as the currency and offering German and French language support.

Your store always has one primary market (usually your home country). Additional markets are optional — you can sell globally from a single market if you prefer.

\n\n

Creating a Market

Navigate to Settings → Markets and click Create Market. Fill in:

Name — A descriptive label (e.g., \"Europe\", \"Asia-Pacific\")
Countries — Which countries belong to this market
Currency — The currency used to display prices in this market
Language — The default language for this market
Tax-inclusive pricing — Enable if prices should include VAT (common in Europe)
Duty mode — DDU (customer pays import duties) or DDP (you pay duties upfront)

\n\n

Setting Market Prices

By default, Cartly converts your base prices to the market currency. For precise control, you can set specific prices per market:

Open a market from Settings → Markets
Click Manage Prices
For each product variant, enter the exact price to display in that market
Optionally set a \"Compare At\" price to show the original price with a strikethrough

Market prices override the automatic conversion for those variants.

\n\n

Translating Content

Navigate to Settings → Translations to translate your product titles, descriptions, collection names, and page content into the languages you support. Customers in a market see translated content if a translation exists for their language; otherwise, your default language is shown.

\n\n

How Customers See Markets

Cartly detects your customer's country automatically and routes them to the matching market. This means a visitor from Germany sees prices in EUR and your German translations — without them needing to select anything manually.

You can also expose a language/currency switcher in your theme for customers who want to change their region manually.

\n\n

Excluding Products from Markets

Some products may not be available in every market — for regulatory reasons or because you do not ship a specific item to certain countries. Open a market and use the Exclusions tab to hide specific products from that market's storefront.

\n\n

Primary Market

The primary market is the default for customers whose country does not match any configured market. It is also used as the fallback for pricing and language. You can change which market is primary at any time from the market detail page.

\n\n

Headless / API Access

If you are using a custom storefront via the Headless Storefront API, prefix your API requests with the locale code to receive market-aware pricing and translated content. For example, GET /storefront/v1/de/products returns products with EUR prices and German titles for your Europe market.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.307908Z","8e36d65b-5767-491c-8832-60103c663cb4","Selling in Multiple Currencies | Cartly Help Center","selling-in-multiple-currencies","Selling in Multiple Currencies","2026-10-06T07:41:10.780812Z",{"_1551":2514,"_1561":2518,"_1554":2519,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2520,"_1568":2521,"_1570":2431,"_1544":2522,"_1572":1766,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2523,"_1577":2524},[2515],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2516},{"_1555":2517},"

What Is Mercado Pago?

Mercado Pago is Latin America's leading payment platform, supporting Pix (Brazil), OXXO (Mexico), Boleto Bancario, and card payments.

Supported Currencies

BRL, ARS, MXN, CLP, COP, PEN, UYU

Getting Your Access Token

Log in to Mercado Pago Developers
Create an application using Checkout Pro
Copy the Production Access Token (or Test credentials for sandbox)

Configuring in Cartly

Go to Admin → Settings → Payments
Find Mercado Pago and click Configure
Paste your Access Token and select your Country
Toggle Sandbox mode on for testing, off for production
Click Test Connection then Save

How Checkout Works

Cartly uses Checkout Pro: customer is redirected to the Mercado Pago hosted page, pays, then returns to your store. Cartly confirms payment via the Mercado Pago API.

Notes

Store currency must match the Mercado Pago country setting
Pix and OXXO payments are confirmed via webhook when payment clears

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.37477Z","2c696cef-fd45-4d7b-b9be-8e6dda6ba605","Accept payments across Latin America with Mercado Pago.","Mercado Pago Setup | Cartly Help Center","mercadopago-setup","Setting Up Mercado Pago Payments","2026-10-06T07:41:10.928853Z",{"_1551":2526,"_1561":2530,"_1554":2531,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2532,"_1568":2533,"_1570":2431,"_1544":2534,"_1572":2535,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2536,"_1577":2537},[2527],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2528},{"_1555":2529},"

What Is Store Credit?

Store credit is a balance in your customer's account that they can use towards future purchases in your store. You can issue store credit as a refund alternative or as a promotional reward.

To issue store credit: go to Customers, open the customer's profile, and use the Store Credit section to add a balance manually — or issue it automatically when processing a refund on an order.

\n\n

Store Credit in Multi-Currency Stores

If your store sells in multiple currencies (via Markets), a customer may have paid in EUR for an order while your store's base currency is USD. When you refund that order to store credit, Cartly now records both:

Original amount and currency — what the customer actually paid (e.g. €45.00 EUR).
Shop-currency equivalent — the amount converted to your base currency at the time of the refund (e.g. $49.50 USD).

The customer's Store Credit balance is stored in your shop's base currency. The original payment amount is shown for transparency in the transaction history.

\n\n

Viewing Store Credit History

Go to Customers → [Customer name] → Store Credit. The transaction history shows:

Date and amount (in shop currency).
Original amount and currency (when the credit came from a foreign-currency refund).
Source (order refund, manual adjustment, or promotional credit).
Running balance after each transaction.

\n\n

Issuing a Refund to Store Credit

Open the order in your admin panel.
Click Refund.
In the refund method dropdown, select Store Credit.
A preview block shows the original order currency and amount, the FX equivalent in shop currency, and the resulting credit balance.
Confirm the refund. The credit is added to the customer's account immediately.

\n\n

Currency Mismatch Warning

If you manually add store credit in a currency that differs from the shop base currency, Cartly shows a warning. This is informational — the credit is still applied. The warning exists because cross-currency credits can cause accounting discrepancies and is an indication to double-check the amount and currency before confirming.

\n\n

Customer Redeeming Store Credit

At checkout, customers with a store credit balance see a \"Use store credit\" option. The credit is applied to the order total in the shop's base currency. If the credit does not cover the full order, the customer pays the remainder with their regular payment method.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.428547Z","f48a683d-7303-4305-964f-f22dcc1dd59a","How store credits work when refunding orders placed in a different currency. Cartly preserves the original payment currency and amount.","Store Credit Multi-Currency | Cartly Help Center","store-credit-multi-currency",95,"Store Credit and Multi-Currency Refunds","2026-10-06T07:41:11.070898Z",{"_1551":2539,"_1561":2543,"_1554":2544,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2545,"_1568":2546,"_1570":2431,"_1544":2547,"_1572":1779,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2548,"_1577":2549},[2540],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2541},{"_1555":2542},"

What Is Adyen?

Adyen is a global payment platform used by some of the largest brands in the world. Shoppers enter their card on a secure, on-page form — no redirect — and 3D Secure is handled automatically. Card details are collected by Adyen's PCI-compliant component and never touch your store.

Installing Adyen

Go to the App Store and install Adyen
Open Admin → Settings → Payments → Adyen

Getting Your Credentials

Log in to your Adyen Customer Area
Copy your API key, Client key, and Merchant account
In the Client key's settings, add every domain your storefront runs on to the allowed origins — the on-page payment form will not load from a domain that is not on this list

Setting Up the Webhook

In Cartly, open Settings → Payments → Adyen and copy the webhook URL shown there
In the Adyen Customer Area, register a Standard webhook at that URL
Generate an HMAC key for the webhook and copy it

Connecting in Cartly

Paste your API key, Client key, Merchant account, and the webhook HMAC key into Settings → Payments → Adyen
Click Test connection
Save

Once connected, Adyen appears as a card payment option at checkout.

","2026-08-20T07:35:57.845867Z","a60ebf27-bfec-4f43-840b-bc2a1e64a7d4","Install Adyen and connect your API key, Client key, Merchant account, and webhook to accept cards with automatic 3D Secure.","Accepting Card Payments with Adyen | Cartly Help Center","accepting-card-payments-with-adyen","Accepting Card Payments with Adyen","2026-10-06T07:41:11.188785Z",{"_1551":2551,"_1561":2555,"_1554":2556,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2557,"_1568":2558,"_1570":2431,"_1544":2559,"_1572":2427,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2560,"_1577":2561},[2552],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2553},{"_1555":2554},"

What Is Klarna?

Klarna gives shoppers the flexibility to Pay in 3, Pay Later, or Pay Now. It appears right on your checkout — there is no redirect to a separate site — and you are paid up front while Klarna takes on the buyer risk.

Installing Klarna

Go to the App Store and install Klarna
Open Admin → Settings → Payments → Klarna

Connecting Your Account

Enter the credentials from your Klarna account
Toggle Klarna on
Save

How It Appears at Checkout

Klarna is offered to shoppers checking out in a currency your Klarna account supports. Where more than one Klarna option is available, the shopper chooses between Pay in 3, Pay Later, and Pay Now on the Klarna widget itself. The order is captured immediately once the shopper completes the Klarna flow.

","2026-08-20T07:35:57.852232Z","48ec406c-5ca3-49b2-bde1-f80521c78d6a","Install Klarna to let shoppers Pay in 3, Pay Later, or Pay Now right on your checkout, with no redirect.","Buy Now, Pay Later with Klarna | Cartly Help Center","buy-now-pay-later-with-klarna","Buy Now, Pay Later with Klarna","2026-10-06T07:41:11.197813Z",{"_1544":2563,"_1546":2564,"_1548":2565},"apps-integrations","Apps & Integrations",[2566,2576,2587,2598,2609,2621,2632,2644,2656,2668,2680,2692,2704,2716,2728,2740,2752],{"_1551":2567,"_1561":2571,"_1554":2572,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2573,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2574,"_1572":1573,"_1574":1575,"_1546":336,"_1577":2575},[2568],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2569},{"_1555":2570},"

Exploring the App Marketplace

The Cartly App Marketplace lets you extend your store's functionality with third-party apps and integrations.

\n\n

What is the Marketplace?

The marketplace is a curated directory of apps built for Cartly. Apps can add new features to your store, connect with external services, or automate repetitive tasks. Each app is reviewed for quality and security before being listed.

\n\n

Browsing Apps

Navigate to Apps in the admin sidebar to open the marketplace. Apps are organized into categories:

Marketing — Email marketing, social media, advertising, SEO tools
Sales — Upsells, cross-sells, product bundles, loyalty programs
Shipping — Carrier integrations, label printing, tracking
Customer Service — Live chat, helpdesk, reviews
Analytics — Reporting, dashboards, data exports
Inventory — Warehouse management, dropshipping, ERP connectors
Finance — Accounting, tax automation, invoicing

Use the search bar to find apps by name or functionality.

\n\n

App Detail Page

Each app listing includes:

Description and screenshots
Pricing (free, monthly fee, or usage-based)
Permissions required (what data the app can access)
Developer information
Version history and changelog

\n\n

App Permissions

When installing an app, you are shown the permissions it requires. Common permissions include read/write access to products, orders, customers, and store settings. Only install apps from trusted developers and review permissions carefully.

\n\n

Featured Apps

The marketplace homepage highlights featured and popular apps. These are curated selections that provide the most value to merchants across different industries.

\n\n

App Support

Each app developer provides their own support channel. Contact information is available on the app detail page. For marketplace-wide issues, contact Cartly support.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.246699Z","1f8d4520-af72-4e3e-968a-787a21d5a042","App Marketplace | Cartly Help Center","marketplace-overview","2026-10-06T07:41:10.523338Z",{"_1551":2577,"_1561":2581,"_1554":2582,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2583,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2584,"_1572":1600,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2585,"_1577":2586},[2578],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2579},{"_1555":2580},"

Installing and Managing Apps

This guide covers how to install, configure, and manage apps from the Cartly marketplace.

\n\n

Installation Process

Navigate to Apps and find the app you want to install
Click Install on the app detail page
Review the permissions the app requires
Click Approve and Install
The app is installed and appears in your Installed Apps list

Some apps may redirect you to the developer's site for additional configuration (e.g., connecting an external account).

\n\n

Embedded Apps

Most Cartly apps run directly within the admin panel using the App Bridge protocol. Embedded apps appear as pages within your admin, providing a seamless experience. They have access to your admin's look and feel, making them feel like native features.

\n\n

App Configuration

After installation, click the app in your Installed Apps list to access its configuration. Each app has its own settings interface. Common configuration tasks include:

Connecting external accounts (e.g., linking a Mailchimp account)
Setting preferences and defaults
Configuring triggers and automation rules
Customizing display options

\n\n

App Updates

When an app developer releases a new version, you will see an update notification in the Apps section. Click Update to install the latest version. Review the changelog to understand what changed before updating.

\n\n

Uninstalling Apps

To uninstall an app, go to Installed Apps, click the app, and select Uninstall. The app's access tokens are revoked and it can no longer access your store data. Its webhooks stop right away, so it receives no more orders or customer data. This also applies to Zapier and Make: their connections to your store are cut and their triggers stop. An app that listens for uninstalls is told once, and receives nothing after that. Some apps may leave behind configuration data; contact the developer if you need a complete data removal.

If the uninstall fails part of the way, for example because of a short outage on our side, the app stays installed and you can try again.

\n\n

App Billing

Paid apps are bought from the app's page: you choose a payment method and pay for the app. Where PayPal is available for your store you can pay with it; see Paying for apps with PayPal. App payments that are being returned to you are listed in Billing → Refunds.

\n\n

Troubleshooting

App not loading — Clear your browser cache and try again. Check if the app developer has reported any outages.
Permission errors — Ensure the app has the necessary permissions. Reinstall if permissions were changed.
Data not syncing — Check the app's sync settings and verify your external account connection.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.250983Z","4060db86-7e18-44ae-83c1-835caf771cc7","Installing Apps | Cartly Help Center","installing-apps","Installing Apps","2026-10-07T12:32:11.529211Z",{"_1551":2588,"_1561":2592,"_1554":2593,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2594,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2595,"_1572":1612,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2596,"_1577":2597},[2589],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2590},{"_1555":2591},"

Configuring Integrations

Cartly's integration engine lets you connect your store with external services using connectors, webhooks, and pre-built templates.

\n\n

What Are Integrations?

Integrations connect your Cartly store to external services — shipping carriers, email providers, accounting software, ERPs, and more. Unlike apps (which add UI features), integrations work in the background to sync data and automate processes.

\n\n

Integration Templates

Cartly provides pre-built integration templates for popular services. Templates include pre-configured request chains, authentication flows, and data mappings. Currently available templates include shipping carriers (Shippo, EasyPost) and more are added regularly.

\n\n

Setting Up a Connector

Navigate to Settings → Integrations
Browse available integration templates or click Create Custom
Select a template and click Install
Enter your API credentials for the external service
Configure the connector settings (endpoints, mappings, etc.)
Test the connection to verify it works
Activate the connector

\n\n

Connector Configuration

Each connector stores:

Credentials — API keys, tokens, or OAuth tokens for the external service (encrypted at rest)
Hooks — Named actions that execute request chains in response to store events (e.g., \"get_rates\" for shipping)
Mappings — How data from Cartly maps to the external service's format and vice versa

\n\n

Webhooks

Cartly can send webhooks to external services when events occur in your store. Navigate to Settings → Webhooks to configure outgoing webhooks. Available events include:

Order created, updated, fulfilled
Product created, updated, deleted
Customer created, updated
Inventory updated

Each webhook sends a JSON payload with the event data to your specified URL.

\n\n

OAuth Integrations

Some integrations use OAuth for secure authentication. When setting up an OAuth integration, you are redirected to the external service to authorize access. Cartly stores the OAuth tokens securely and refreshes them automatically when they expire.

\n\n

Monitoring Integrations

Each connector tracks its execution history. View recent executions, success/failure rates, and response times in the connector detail page. Failed executions include error messages to help diagnose issues.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.255965Z","fdca3e25-3d09-4149-b5ad-ed2da33b82e2","Setting Up Integrations | Cartly Help Center","integrations-setup","Setting Up Integrations","2026-10-06T07:41:10.545086Z",{"_1551":2599,"_1561":2603,"_1554":2604,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2605,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2606,"_1572":1624,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2607,"_1577":2608},[2600],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2601},{"_1555":2602},"

Publishing Your App to the Marketplace

Developers can build and publish apps for the Cartly marketplace. This guide covers the submission process.

\n\n

Developer Account

To publish apps, you need a Cartly developer account. Register through the developer portal and agree to the developer terms of service. Developer accounts are free.

\n\n

Building Your App

Cartly apps use OAuth 2.0 for authentication and REST/GraphQL APIs for data access. Your app needs:

OAuth client — Register your app in the developer portal to get client ID and secret
Redirect URI — The URL where merchants are sent after authorizing your app
Scopes — The permissions your app needs (read_products, write_orders, etc.)
App UI — Your app's interface, either embedded in the Cartly admin via App Bridge or hosted externally

\n\n

App Bridge

For embedded apps, use the Cartly App Bridge JavaScript SDK to integrate your app seamlessly into the admin panel. App Bridge provides:

Authentication token management
Navigation within the admin
Modal and toast notifications
Action buttons in the admin header

\n\n

Submission Process

Create a listing — In the developer portal, create your app listing with title, description, screenshots, and pricing
Upload a release — Submit a release with your app version, changelog, and required permissions
Review — The Cartly team reviews your app for security, functionality, and user experience. This typically takes 3-5 business days.
Approval — Once approved, your app is published to the marketplace and available for merchants to install

\n\n

Review Criteria

Apps are evaluated on:

Security — Proper OAuth implementation, secure data handling
Functionality — The app works as described without critical bugs
Performance — The app does not degrade the merchant's admin experience
UX — Clear instructions, intuitive interface, proper error handling
Privacy — Transparent data usage, GDPR compliance

\n\n

App Updates

Submit new releases through the developer portal. Minor updates (bug fixes, UI improvements) are auto-approved. Major updates that change permissions or core functionality go through the review process again.

\n\n

Revenue Share

Cartly charges a 20% revenue share on paid app subscriptions. Payouts are processed monthly through Stripe Connect. Free apps have no revenue share.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.259103Z","c5197c76-5138-45f0-ad9e-cb8653c4384d","Publishing an App | Cartly Help Center","publishing-app","Publishing an App","2026-10-06T07:41:10.554687Z",{"_1551":2610,"_1561":2614,"_1554":2615,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2616,"_1568":2617,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2618,"_1572":1636,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2619,"_1577":2620},[2611],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2612},{"_1555":2613},"

Selling on eBay

The eBay sales channel publishes your Cartly catalog to eBay, keeps stock in sync between the two, imports eBay orders into Cartly, and pushes tracking numbers back to eBay when you fulfill.

\n\n

Connecting your account

Go to Admin → Integrations → eBay and connect your eBay seller account. Choose the eBay marketplace you sell on, then set your fulfillment, payment, and return business policies and your merchant location — eBay requires these on every listing.

\n\n

Choosing what to sell

Not every product in your catalog has to go to eBay. Scope which products are eligible by collection, by tag, or leave both empty to publish your entire active catalog. Only active products in scope are published.

\n\n

Currency

eBay lists in the marketplace's own currency. Your shop's currency must match the eBay marketplace you choose — Cartly checks this before publishing and blocks the run rather than listing prices in the wrong currency.

\n\n

Publishing and stock sync

Publish your scoped products to create eBay listings from your saved policies and location. After that, stock levels are kept in sync automatically in both directions, so a sale on eBay or in Cartly is reflected on the other side without any manual stock adjustment.

\n\n

Importing eBay orders

Orders placed on eBay are imported into Cartly automatically and appear alongside your other orders. Cartly never skips over an order that fails to import — it retries automatically until it succeeds, so nothing gets lost.

\n\n

Fulfillment and tracking

When you fulfill an order that came from eBay, its tracking number and carrier are pushed back to eBay automatically — buyers see tracking on eBay without you doing anything extra.

","2026-08-05T19:12:33.887093Z","dfbaa294-e40d-4565-975c-28890ba6f396","Connect eBay to publish your catalog, sync stock both ways, import eBay orders, and push tracking numbers back automatically.","Selling on eBay | Cartly Help Center","selling-on-ebay","Selling on eBay","2026-10-06T07:41:10.56864Z",{"_1551":2622,"_1561":2626,"_1554":2627,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2628,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2629,"_1572":1636,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2630,"_1577":2631},[2623],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2624},{"_1555":2625},"

App Blocks (Theme App Extensions)

Some apps from the Cartly Marketplace can add UI elements directly into your storefront theme. These are called App Blocks. Once you install an app that supports App Blocks, you can place those blocks anywhere on your product pages, collection pages, or homepage — without editing code.

\n\n

What Can App Blocks Do?

Examples of what App Blocks can add to your storefront:

Product review stars below the product title
Loyalty points balance in the cart
Upsell or cross-sell recommendations after the add-to-cart button
Size guide popups tied to product metafields
Live chat widgets in the page footer

\n\n

Activating App Blocks

Install the app from Apps → App Marketplace. If the app supports App Blocks, a notification will confirm they are now available in your theme editor.
Navigate to Online Store → Themes and click Customize on your active theme.
In the section panel on the left, scroll to the page type where you want to add the block (e.g., Product Pages).
Click Add Section and look for the app's blocks under the Apps category.
Drag the block to the desired position and configure its settings in the right panel.
Click Save.

\n\n

Configuring App Block Settings

Each App Block can have its own settings — heading text, colors, visibility conditions. These appear in the editor's right panel when the block is selected, just like any other section settings.

\n\n

Removing App Blocks

In the theme editor, select the App Block in the left panel and click the trash icon to remove it. Alternatively, uninstalling the app automatically removes all of its blocks from your theme templates.

\n\n

Compatibility

App Blocks work with Liquid-based themes (Cartly 1.3+). If your theme was created before March 2026 and does not support App Blocks, reinstall or duplicate your theme to get the latest template structure.

\n\n

Troubleshooting

Block not appearing after install — Make sure the app is fully installed and active. Try refreshing the theme editor.
Block shows an error on storefront — Contact the app developer. The block's render template may have an issue.
Can't find the block in the editor — Only Liquid themes support App Blocks. Switch to a compatible theme.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.303583Z","8eda097e-1180-4cf6-b012-4160f9d113ff","App Blocks in Your Theme | Cartly Help Center","theme-app-extensions","Installing App Blocks in Your Theme","2026-10-06T07:41:10.738488Z",{"_1551":2633,"_1561":2637,"_1554":2638,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2639,"_1568":2640,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2641,"_1572":1649,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2642,"_1577":2643},[2634],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2635},{"_1555":2636},"

Connecting Your Accounting or CRM

Cartly connects natively to QuickBooks Online, Xero, and Salesforce so paid orders flow into your books or your CRM without any manual re-entry.

\n\n

QuickBooks Online and Xero

Connect either from Admin → Integrations — both use a standard OAuth connection, so you authorize Cartly directly from your QuickBooks or Xero account with no API keys to copy. Once connected, every paid order is exported automatically: as a Sales Receipt in QuickBooks, or as an invoice in Xero. Line items, shipping, and tax are reconciled to match exactly what the customer paid, including any discount, gift card, or store credit applied at checkout.

Orders marked paid by hand — for example a bank transfer or cash-on-delivery order — export the same way as a card payment, so nothing needs a manual entry on the accounting side.

If an order was placed before the connector was set up, a manual re-export option lets you send it across afterwards.

\n\n

Salesforce

Connect your Salesforce org from Admin → Integrations → Salesforce. Each paid order creates or updates a Contact — or a Lead, if you prefer to sync buyers as leads — and, when enabled, a closed-won Opportunity for the order amount. Re-running an export never creates a duplicate Contact or Opportunity for the same order.

\n\n

Managing your connection

Every connector can be reconfigured or disconnected at any time from Admin → Integrations. Disconnecting stops future exports; it does not undo anything already exported.

","2026-08-05T19:12:33.890025Z","0a1244bb-0c9f-46b5-b7f6-57d0d7b1bfea","Connect QuickBooks Online, Xero, or Salesforce and have paid orders export automatically as sales documents, contacts, and opportunities.","Connecting Your Accounting or CRM | Cartly Help Center","connecting-your-accounting-or-crm","Connecting Your Accounting or CRM","2026-10-06T07:41:10.584141Z",{"_1551":2645,"_1561":2649,"_1554":2650,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2651,"_1568":2652,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2653,"_1572":1649,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2654,"_1577":2655},[2646],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2647},{"_1555":2648},"

What Is Zapier?

Zapier connects Cartly to 6,000+ apps. Build Zaps without writing code.

Installing the Cartly App on Zapier

Go to Cartly App Store and install Zapier
Authorize the connection in your Cartly admin

Triggers

New Order, Order Updated, Order Fulfilled, Order Canceled
New Product, Product Updated
New Customer

Actions

Create Customer, Update Order, Adjust Inventory, Create Discount

Searches

Find Customer by email, Find Order by number

Troubleshooting

Trigger not firing: make sure the Zap is turned on
Authorization error: reconnect your account in Zapier

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.370725Z","928d717e-1891-406a-9025-1e615639043d","Automate workflows by connecting Cartly to 6,000+ apps via Zapier.","Zapier Integration | Cartly Help Center","zapier-integration","Connecting Zapier to Your Cartly Store","2026-10-06T07:41:10.90973Z",{"_1551":2657,"_1561":2661,"_1554":2662,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2663,"_1568":2664,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2665,"_1572":1662,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2666,"_1577":2667},[2658],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2659},{"_1555":2660},"

What This Integration Does

If you manage your catalog in an external ERP, accounting, or inventory-management system, a connector keeps your Cartly store in sync with it automatically — products, stock levels, prices, images, and product options grouped into proper Cartly variants come in, and orders placed in your store export back out, including their status as it changes.

\n\n

Connecting Your System

Go to Apps, find your ERP or accounting integration, and click Install
Enter the connection details and credentials for your external system when prompted
Click Test Connection to confirm Cartly can reach your system
Open the integration's configuration page to choose what syncs and how

\n\n

Catalog Import

Depending on the connector, your catalog arrives either in real time via webhooks or on a schedule that runs periodically in the background. Either way, the import brings in products, variants, prices, multi-warehouse stock levels, and images.

\n\n

Choosing Which Fields Sync

You control exactly which catalog fields the integration is allowed to update on an already-imported product. Available toggles include:

Name and Description
Images
SKU / Barcode
Weight
Custom attributes (mapped to Cartly metafields — see below)

Stock and price are always kept in sync. Fields you leave off are never overwritten by the sync, so you can safely combine data managed in Cartly with data managed in your external system.

\n\n

Mapping Price Lists

Most ERP and accounting systems support multiple price lists or price types (for example, a retail list and a wholesale list). In your integration's configuration, map the price type you want to use to Cartly's three price fields:

Price — the selling price shown to customers
Compare-at price — the original price, shown struck through when a product is on sale
Cost — your cost of goods, used for margin reporting (see Tracking Product Cost (COGS))

\n\n

Mapping Warehouses to Locations

If your external system tracks stock across multiple warehouses, map each warehouse to the matching Cartly inventory location. Stock levels then sync per location, so multi-warehouse fulfillment stays accurate on both sides.

\n\n

Mapping Custom Attributes to Metafields

If your external system stores custom product attributes (material, care instructions, certifications, and so on), map each attribute to a Cartly metafield. Enable attribute syncing, then for each attribute choose the target metafield namespace, key, and type. Mapped attributes update automatically on every sync.

\n\n

Matching Existing Products on First Import

If your Cartly store already has products before you connect the integration, choose how the first import matches them to avoid creating duplicates:

By SKU — matches products whose SKU is identical in both systems
By barcode — matches products whose barcode (UPC/EAN/ISBN) is identical in both systems

You can enable one or both matching rules. Products that do not match an existing SKU or barcode are created as new products.

\n\n

Product Options, Variants & Characteristics

When your external system organizes a product into modifications, SKUs, or characteristics that differ by attribute (color, size, and so on), the integration groups them into a single Cartly product with proper options and variants — the same option/variant model used by the Options Builder.

\n\n

Order Export

Orders placed and paid in your Cartly store export back to your external system automatically, as a document addressed to the correct counterparty. Cartly resolves the counterparty per buyer, so repeat and new customers are matched to (or created as) the right party in your external system. Depending on your configuration, discounts, tax, and delivery charges can also be reflected directly on the exported document's lines, so the totals match what the customer actually paid.

\n\n

Order-Status Back-Sync

When a manager updates an order's status in your connected system — for example, marking it fulfilled or shipped — Cartly reflects that change by moving the order along its own fulfillment lifecycle automatically. Payment statuses are protected: a status change coming back from your external system never rolls back or reverses an order's payment state.

\n\n

Re-Exporting Older Orders

Orders placed before the connector was fully configured are not exported automatically. Open any such order and use the manual re-export action to send it to your external system after the fact.

\n\n

How Updates Arrive: Webhooks Plus a Safety Net

Where the connector supports it, changes in your external system are pushed to Cartly in real time via webhooks, so your catalog reflects updates within moments. As a safety net, a scheduled background sync also runs periodically and reconciles anything a webhook might have missed — so your catalog and your external system never drift apart for long, even after a temporary outage on either side.

\n\n

Monitoring the Sync

Each sync run is logged with its result. Open the integration's detail page to see recent sync history, including any items that failed to sync and why, so you can correct the underlying data at the source and re-run the sync.

\n\n

Managing or Removing a Connector

Every connected integration is listed under Admin → Integrations, where you can review its configuration, reconnect it if credentials change, or remove it entirely if you no longer need it.

","2026-07-06T19:11:52.170895Z","d8757c7d-8a99-44a3-bc3e-d2505ac1ccf4","Sync products, stock, prices, and orders — in both directions — between Cartly and your ERP or accounting system.","Connecting an External ERP or Inventory System | Cartly Help Center","connecting-an-external-erp-or-inventory-system","Connecting an External ERP or Inventory System","2026-10-06T07:41:10.917178Z",{"_1551":2669,"_1561":2673,"_1554":2674,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2675,"_1568":2676,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2677,"_1572":1662,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2678,"_1577":2679},[2670],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2671},{"_1555":2672},"

Email and SMS from Your Own Provider

Two first-party apps let your order emails and text messages go out through an account you control: the SendGrid app for email, and the Twilio app for SMS. Install either from the AppStore.

\n\n

SendGrid (email)

Once installed, open the app from your Installed Apps list and enter your SendGrid API key and sending address. When configured, SendGrid takes over sending for your store — transactional emails (order confirmations, review requests, and more) and email campaigns all go out through your own SendGrid account and domain instead of Cartly's shared sender. If the app is ever uninstalled or its key becomes invalid, your store falls back automatically to whatever provider is configured in Settings → Email, or to the platform default — outgoing mail is never interrupted.

\n\n

Twilio (SMS)

Once installed, open the app and enter your Twilio Account SID, Auth Token, and the phone number to send from. You can enable a text message to the buyer when their order is confirmed, and separately enable a text to your own phone number on every new sale. Both messages use an editable template with placeholders for the customer's name, the order number, the total, and your store name, so you can word them however you like.

\n\n

Testing your setup

Each app's settings page includes a test-send action so you can confirm your credentials work before relying on them for live orders.

","2026-08-05T19:12:33.892472Z","1f31f1d5-097f-45d1-aa76-4a86642c0c09","Install the first-party SendGrid and Twilio apps to send order email and SMS notifications through your own account.","Email & SMS Notifications | Cartly Help Center","email-and-sms-notifications","Email & SMS Notifications","2026-10-06T07:41:10.593506Z",{"_1551":2681,"_1561":2685,"_1554":2686,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2687,"_1568":2688,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2689,"_1572":1754,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2690,"_1577":2691},[2682],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2683},{"_1555":2684},"

Overview

ShipEngine and Shippo are native shipping connectors that quote real, up-to-the-minute rates from multiple carriers at checkout and let you buy and void shipping labels straight from the order page.

Connecting a Carrier Connector

Go to the App Store and install ShipEngine or Shippo
Open Admin → Integrations and connect your carrier accounts

Live Rates at Checkout

Once connected, live rates from your carriers appear as shipping options at checkout. Shoppers choose the speed and price that suits them, instead of a single flat rate you set by hand.

Buying and Voiding Labels

Open an order and go to the fulfillment section
Choose a rate and click Buy label
The tracking number and carrier are written back to the order automatically

If you buy a label by mistake, Void label is available from the same section, subject to the carrier's own void window.

","2026-08-20T07:35:57.856275Z","7690ef6f-210e-42ed-bb2b-447d8b6b8d98","Connect ShipEngine or Shippo for live carrier rates at checkout, and buy or void shipping labels from the order page.","Live Shipping Rates & Labels | Cartly Help Center","live-shipping-rates-and-labels","Live Shipping Rates & Labels","2026-10-06T07:41:11.205415Z",{"_1551":2693,"_1561":2697,"_1554":2698,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2699,"_1568":2700,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2701,"_1572":1766,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2702,"_1577":2703},[2694],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2695},{"_1555":2696},"

What Is AfterShip?

AfterShip automatically tracks packages as they move through the carrier network, so you don't have to manually check tracking numbers or field \"where is my order\" questions.

Installing AfterShip

Go to the App Store and install AfterShip
Open Admin → Integrations → AfterShip and connect your account

How Tracking Is Created

Tracking is created automatically the moment you fulfill an order with a tracking number and carrier — there is nothing extra to do per order.

What Customers See

Customers see delivery checkpoints on their order as the shipment moves, plus a branded tracking page they can visit for the latest status — keeping them on your brand instead of a generic carrier site.

","2026-08-20T07:35:57.858933Z","0384bb7b-8c93-4756-97db-d0f06f0f54de","Install AfterShip to automatically track shipments and show customers delivery checkpoints on a branded tracking page.","Automated Order Tracking | Cartly Help Center","automated-order-tracking","Automated Order Tracking","2026-10-06T07:41:11.216492Z",{"_1551":2705,"_1561":2709,"_1554":2710,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2711,"_1568":2712,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2713,"_1572":1779,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2714,"_1577":2715},[2706],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2707},{"_1555":2708},"

What It Does

This connector keeps your Cartly customer data in sync with the email or SMS marketing platform you already use — Klaviyo, Mailchimp, Brevo, Omnisend, or Bird (formerly MessageBird). New customers, newsletter subscribers, and paid-order events flow across automatically, so you can build campaigns and automations on real store data.

Connecting Your Account

Go to the App Store and install the marketing app you use
Open the app under Settings → Integrations
Paste your API key from the provider, or click Connect if the app supports one-click authorization
Click Test to confirm the connection works
Choose the list or audience you want Cartly to sync to
Enable the sync toggle

What Syncs

New customers
Newsletter sign-ups
Paid orders, sent as events that can trigger flows and automations in your marketing platform

Notes

You can turn the sync off at any time from the app's settings without losing your connection. To remove the app entirely, uninstall it from the App Store → Marketplace using Uninstall.

","2026-08-25T17:05:43.318128Z","ef778dfb-ea68-4286-9f3a-1243ea22bfa5","Sync customers, newsletter subscribers, and paid orders to Klaviyo, Mailchimp, Brevo, Omnisend, or Bird.","Connect a marketing app | Cartly Help Center","connecting-an-email-or-sms-marketing-app","Connecting an email or SMS marketing app","2026-10-06T07:41:11.228253Z",{"_1551":2717,"_1561":2721,"_1554":2722,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2723,"_1568":2724,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2725,"_1572":2427,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2726,"_1577":2727},[2718],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2719},{"_1555":2720},"

What It Does

The Judge.me connector brings the reviews you've already collected — star ratings, photos, and verified-buyer badges — onto your Cartly storefront, matched to the right products automatically.

Connecting Your Account

Go to the App Store and install Judge.me Reviews
Open the app and click Connect
Sign in to Judge.me with your store domain and authorize the connection

Once connected, your existing reviews import automatically and re-sync on a schedule, so new and updated reviews keep appearing without any manual work.

How Reviews Are Matched

A review is imported only when its Judge.me product handle matches a Cartly product's URL slug. Reviews with no matching product are skipped, and the connector shows you how many were skipped so you can check for mismatched handles.

Settings

Auto-approve imported reviews — turn on to publish imported reviews immediately, or off to hold them for manual moderation
Sync now — re-import immediately instead of waiting for the next scheduled sync
Disconnect — stops importing new reviews but keeps the reviews you've already imported on your storefront

","2026-08-25T17:05:43.324753Z","6f13f6d4-917f-4855-b902-edf119477492","Import your existing Judge.me product reviews — star ratings, photos, and verified badges — onto your storefront.","Import Judge.me reviews | Cartly Help Center","importing-your-product-reviews-from-judge-me","Importing your product reviews from Judge.me","2026-10-06T07:41:11.241444Z",{"_1551":2729,"_1561":2733,"_1554":2734,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2735,"_1568":2736,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2737,"_1572":2191,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2738,"_1577":2739},[2730],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2731},{"_1555":2732},"

What It Does

The Google Analytics app brings your Google Analytics 4 (GA4) traffic data into your Cartly admin — daily sessions, active users, and new users, plus Top channels and Top landing pages — shown as a clearly-labeled second section on your Analytics page, right beside your Cartly orders and funnel. The two are never merged: your Google Analytics numbers and Cartly's own numbers each stay honest about where they came from.

Connecting Your Account

Go to the App Store and install Google Analytics.
Open the app's settings page and copy the Cartly service-account email shown there.
In Google Analytics, go to Admin → Property Access Management and add that email as a Viewer on your GA4 property.
Back in Google Analytics, go to Admin → Property details and copy your numeric Property ID.
Paste the Property ID into the Cartly app and click Test Connection.

There's nothing to install or configure on the Google side beyond granting Viewer access — Cartly reads your property through a single platform-level service account, so no developer work or GA4 API key is needed.

Seeing Your Data

Once connected, go to Admin → Analytics to see your Google Analytics section. Data can take a few hours to appear after you first connect, and GA4 itself has a normal processing delay of 24–48 hours before the newest days are complete — this is how Google Analytics works everywhere, not a Cartly limitation.

Notes

Google Analytics data is shown separately from — and is never merged with — your Cartly order and funnel analytics, since the two measure traffic differently (cookie consent, ad blockers, and attribution models all differ between systems).
Only one GA4 property can be connected per store.
If the Google Analytics app doesn't appear in your App Store, this feature isn't available for your store yet.

","2026-09-10T10:42:14.693424Z","8582f659-80cb-409c-be17-f9fba6d367a4","Connect a Google Analytics 4 property to see sessions, top channels, and top landing pages right in your Cartly analytics dashboard.","Connecting Google Analytics | Cartly Help Center","connecting-google-analytics","Connecting Google Analytics to your store","2026-10-06T07:41:11.300772Z",{"_1551":2741,"_1561":2745,"_1554":2746,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2747,"_1568":2748,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2749,"_1572":2750,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2751,"_1577":2745},[2742],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2743},{"_1555":2744},"

Paying for an App with PayPal

Paid apps in the App Store can be bought with PayPal when PayPal is available for your store. It works for apps with a one-time price and for apps billed monthly.

\n\n

How It Works

Open the app in the App Store inside your admin and start the purchase.
In the purchase window, choose Pay with PayPal. The button shows the price. If you do not see it, PayPal is not available for your store yet; the window lists the payment methods you can use.
Approve the payment at PayPal.
PayPal sends you back to the app page. A one-time purchase is completed on that page straight away. A monthly subscription is switched on when PayPal confirms the first payment, so the page may say the payment is processing. Refresh it after a moment.

PayPal is pay-first: the app is not installed until the payment goes through. If you close PayPal without approving, nothing is charged and nothing is installed.

\n\n

Apps That Need Authorizing

Some apps connect to your store through an extra authorization step. If the app page shows Authorize the app after you have paid, click it to finish connecting.

\n\n

Cancelling a PayPal Subscription

A subscription paid through PayPal is cancelled at the end of the billing period. You keep access until then and you are not charged again. Cancel now with a prorated refund is not offered for PayPal subscriptions.

\n\n

When a Payment Cannot Be Applied

If PayPal takes a payment that cannot be applied to an app, for example because you already own the app or the app was withdrawn from the App Store in the meantime, the payment is returned to you. Open Billing → Refunds to follow it. Each refund shows its status: Refund in progress, Refunded or Settled.

\n\n

Fixing a Failed Card Payment

If you paid for an app by card and the last payment failed, the app page shows Update payment method. It opens the Stripe billing portal for that app subscription, where you can replace the card. Only the store owner or an admin can use it.

\n\n

Installing Apps
App Marketplace

","2026-10-07T12:32:11.55184Z","60baa5fd-8c2c-4830-a39b-a04e52c5d3b5","Buy paid App Store apps with PayPal, one-time or monthly. How the pay-first flow works, how to cancel, and where refunds show up in Billing.","Paying for apps with PayPal | Cartly Help Center","paying-for-apps-with-paypal",130,"Paying for apps with PayPal",{"_1551":2753,"_1561":2757,"_1554":2758,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2759,"_1568":2760,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2761,"_1572":2762,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2763,"_1577":2757},[2754],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2755},{"_1555":2756},"

What Webhooks Do

A webhook sends an HTTP request to a URL you choose whenever something happens in your store, such as a new order. Open Webhooks in the Settings section of the admin sidebar to manage them. Webhooks are available on plans that include them; you can check your plan under Billing. Developers can find the technical details in the Webhooks guide.

\n\n

Adding a Webhook

Click Add Webhook, enter the endpoint URL and pick the topics you want delivered to it. The URL has to answer with a success status (2xx) within 10 seconds, and it must not redirect: a redirect counts as a failed delivery, so use the final URL.

\n\n

Status of a Webhook

Active: deliveries are going through.
Failing: recent deliveries failed. The last error is shown under the status, so you can see what your endpoint answered.
Disabled: the webhook failed 5 times in a row over at least an hour, so Cartly switched it off. A short outage of your endpoint does not do this. Events that happen while a webhook is disabled are not sent to it later.

\n\n

Send Test

Click Send test to send one test event to the endpoint right now. It is signed like a real delivery and is not retried. Send test and Retry wait up to 30 seconds for an answer, while live deliveries wait 10 seconds, so an endpoint that is slow can pass Send test and still time out on live deliveries. If your endpoint accepts it, the webhook is Active again, which is also how you switch a disabled webhook back on after fixing the endpoint. On a disabled webhook the button reads Send test & re-enable.

\n\n

Failed Deliveries

Every delivery your endpoint did not accept is kept in the Dead Letter Queue below the webhook list, with the webhook URL, the topic, the error, when it failed and how many attempts were made. For each one you can:

Retry: send it again now. A successful retry removes it from the list and re-enables a disabled webhook.
Discard: remove it without sending it again.
Retry All: retry the failed deliveries on the current page one at a time. Any that fail again stay in the list.

The list is split into pages when there are many failed deliveries.

\n\n

Deleting a Webhook

Deleting a webhook stops its deliveries immediately. When you uninstall an app, the webhooks it created stop as well; see Installing Apps.

","2026-10-07T12:32:11.553078Z","6f1a3f39-f2d7-4c03-a67f-a28280fb552c","Add a webhook, see whether it is Active, Failing or Disabled, send a test, and retry or discard failed deliveries from Settings → Webhooks.","Managing Webhooks in Your Admin | Cartly Help Center","managing-webhooks-in-your-admin",140,"Managing webhooks in your admin",{"_1544":1558,"_1546":2765,"_1548":2766},"Settings & Configuration",[2767,2778,2789,2800,2811,2822,2833,2844,2856,2868,2880,2892,2904,2916,2929,2942,2954,2966],{"_1551":2768,"_1561":2772,"_1554":2773,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2774,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2775,"_1572":1573,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2776,"_1577":2777},[2769],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2770},{"_1555":2771},"

Store Settings

General settings control your store's basic information and global configuration options.

\n\n

Store Details

Navigate to Settings → General to configure your store's core information:

Store name — Displayed in the header, emails, and browser tab. Keep it short and recognizable.
Store email — The primary contact email. Used as the \"from\" address for transactional emails and displayed on your contact page.
Store phone — Optional contact phone number displayed on your storefront.
Store description — A brief description used in meta tags and social sharing.

\n\n

Store ID

Under Store Information the settings page also shows your Store ID, read-only, with a button to copy it. Developers use it as the X-Shop-ID header of the Storefront GraphQL API. The API also accepts your store slug (my-store) or your store address (my-store.mycartly.pro), but the Store ID is the value that never changes. See the GraphQL guide.

\n\n

Business Address

Your business address is used for:

Shipping rate calculations (as the origin address)
Tax determination
Invoice and packing slip generation
Legal compliance (displayed in emails and legal pages)

Fill in all address fields: street address, city, state/province, postal code, and country.

\n\n

Standards and Formats

Configure regional settings:

Currency — Your store's base currency. Set during creation and cannot be changed after orders are placed.
Timezone — Used for order timestamps, reports, and scheduled tasks. Set to your business location's timezone.
Weight unit — Kilograms (kg) or pounds (lb). Used for product weights and shipping calculations.

\n\n

Legal Pages

Cartly allows you to configure essential legal pages:

Privacy Policy — Required by law in most jurisdictions
Terms of Service — Your store's terms and conditions
Refund Policy — Your return and refund rules
Shipping Policy — Delivery times, costs, and regions

These pages are linked in your store's footer and referenced during checkout.

\n\n

Social Media

Add your social media profile URLs (Instagram, Facebook, Twitter/X, TikTok, YouTube). These are displayed as icons in your store's footer and used for Open Graph meta tags when your pages are shared on social media.

\n\n

Favicon

Upload a favicon (32x32 or 16x16 PNG) that appears in the browser tab next to your store name. A recognizable favicon helps customers identify your store among their open tabs.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.26175Z","0b394fdf-c592-41d5-9dd5-331e15ac0ad0","General Settings | Cartly Help Center","general-settings","General Settings","2026-10-07T12:32:11.536926Z",{"_1551":2779,"_1561":2783,"_1554":2784,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2785,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2786,"_1572":1600,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2787,"_1577":2788},[2780],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2781},{"_1555":2782},"

Configuring Shipping

Shipping zones and rates determine how shipping costs are calculated for your customers during checkout.

\n\n

What Are Shipping Zones?

A shipping zone is a geographic area (one or more countries) that shares the same shipping rates. For example, you might create a \"Domestic\" zone for your home country with lower rates and an \"International\" zone with higher rates.

\n\n

Creating a Shipping Zone

Navigate to Settings → Shipping and click Add Shipping Zone:

Enter a zone name (e.g., \"United States\", \"Europe\", \"Rest of World\")
Select the countries included in this zone
Add one or more shipping rates

\n\n

Shipping Rates

Each zone can have multiple shipping rates. For each rate, configure:

Name — The label shown to customers at checkout (e.g., \"Standard Shipping\", \"Express Delivery\")
Price — The shipping cost in your base currency
Conditions — Optional conditions based on order weight or price range

\n\n

Rate Types

Flat rate — A fixed shipping cost regardless of order size (e.g., $5.00 flat rate)
Weight-based — Rates vary based on the total order weight (e.g., $5 for 0-1kg, $10 for 1-5kg)
Price-based — Rates vary based on the order subtotal (e.g., $7 for orders under $50, free for orders over $50)

\n\n

Free Shipping

Set up free shipping by creating a rate with a $0 price. You can add a condition to make it apply only above a minimum order amount (e.g., \"Free shipping on orders over $75\"). This is one of the most effective conversion tools — customers often add more items to qualify for free shipping.

\n\n

Carrier-Calculated Rates

If you have a shipping carrier integration (e.g., Shippo) connected, Cartly can fetch real-time rates from carriers like USPS, UPS, and FedEx. Carrier rates are merged with your configured zone rates and displayed together at checkout, giving customers more shipping options.

\n\n

Checkout Experience

During checkout, Cartly determines the customer's shipping zone based on their address, then presents all applicable shipping rates. The customer selects their preferred option. If no zone matches the customer's country, they see a message that shipping is not available to their location.

\n\n

Local Pickup

Enable local pickup as a shipping option for customers who want to collect their order in person. Add a local pickup rate with a $0 price and a descriptive name like \"Local Pickup — 123 Main St\".

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.266152Z","33df1379-8fc1-403f-a204-c07797c44d45","Shipping Zones & Rates | Cartly Help Center","shipping-zones","Shipping Zones & Rates","2026-10-06T07:41:10.633182Z",{"_1551":2790,"_1561":2794,"_1554":2795,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2796,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2797,"_1572":1612,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2798,"_1577":2799},[2791],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2792},{"_1555":2793},"

Managing Team Members

Invite team members to your Cartly admin panel and control what they can access with role-based permissions.

\n\n

Inviting a Team Member

Navigate to Settings → Team and click Invite Member. Enter their email address and select a role. An invitation email is sent with a link to create their account and join your store.

\n\n

Roles

Cartly provides the following roles:

Owner — Full access to everything, including billing and store deletion. Only one owner per store.
Admin — Full access to all features except billing management and ownership transfer.
Staff — Access to day-to-day operations: products, orders, customers, and content. Cannot change settings, integrations, or team members.

\n\n

View-Only Pages for Staff

Many pages that only the store owner or an admin can change, such as Settings, Taxes, Currencies, Locations, Inventory, Customer Groups and Gift Cards, still open for staff. They show a \"View only\" notice at the top and their fields and buttons are disabled, so staff can look but not change anything, and see why instead of getting an error.

\n\n

Managing Permissions

For staff members, you can further customize access by enabling or disabling specific sections:

Products — Create, edit, and delete products
Orders — View and manage orders, process fulfillment
Customers — View and edit customer profiles
Discounts — Create and manage discounts
Content — Manage pages, blog posts, and navigation
Analytics — View store analytics and reports

\n\n

Two-Step Verification for Sensitive Actions

If two-step verification is turned on for your account, Cartly asks for a current code before these actions: creating an API key, giving a team member the Admin role, inviting someone as an Admin (and resending that invitation), and confirming or rejecting an unconfirmed refund. Enter the code from your authenticator app. Once accepted, it stays valid for 5 minutes, so you do not need to repeat it for each action in that time. Inviting someone as Staff does not need a code.

\n\n

Revoking Access

To remove a team member, go to Settings → Team, click the member, and select Remove. Their session is immediately invalidated and they can no longer access your admin panel. Their past actions remain in the audit log.

\n\n

Audit Trail

Every action taken by a team member is recorded in the audit log with their name and timestamp. Navigate to Settings → Activity Log to see who changed what and when. This is essential for accountability in multi-person teams.

\n\n

Security Best Practices

Grant the minimum permissions needed for each role
Use individual accounts — never share login credentials
Remove access promptly when a team member leaves
Review the audit log regularly for unexpected changes
Encourage team members to enable two-factor authentication

\n\n

Staff Account Limits

The number of staff accounts depends on your subscription plan. The Starter plan includes 3 accounts, Growth includes 5, Pro includes 15, and Enterprise includes unlimited accounts. The store owner does not count toward the limit.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.271778Z","a03b9010-d820-463f-819f-fe215e1f50e6","Team Members | Cartly Help Center","team-members","Team Members","2026-10-07T12:32:11.547063Z",{"_1551":2801,"_1561":2805,"_1554":2806,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2807,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2808,"_1572":1624,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2809,"_1577":2810},[2802],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2803},{"_1555":2804},"

Using the Audit Log

The audit log records every administrative action taken in your store, providing a complete trail of who did what and when.

\n\n

What Gets Logged

All state-changing operations (create, update, delete) in the admin panel are recorded:

Product created, updated, or deleted
Order status changed, fulfilled, or refunded
Discount created or modified
Settings changed
Team member invited or removed
Theme or page content updated
Integration connector configured
Customer information updated

Read-only actions (viewing lists, reading details) are not logged to keep the audit trail focused on meaningful changes.

\n\n

Viewing the Audit Log

Navigate to Settings → Activity Log to view the audit trail. Each entry shows:

Action — What was done (e.g., \"product.update\", \"order.fulfill\")
User — Who performed the action
Resource — What was affected (with a link to the resource)
Timestamp — When the action occurred
Details — Additional context (e.g., which fields were changed)

\n\n

Filtering the Log

Filter the audit log by:

User — See all actions by a specific team member
Action type — Filter by create, update, or delete
Resource type — Show only product changes, order changes, etc.
Date range — Narrow down to a specific time period

\n\n

Use Cases

The audit log is valuable for:

Troubleshooting — \"Who changed the price on this product?\" Check the log to find out.
Accountability — Know which team member performed each action.
Compliance — Maintain a record of all data access and modifications for regulatory requirements.
Training — Review new team members' actions to ensure they are following procedures.

\n\n

Retention

Audit log entries are stored permanently and cannot be deleted or modified. This ensures the integrity of the audit trail. Older entries can be archived but remain accessible through date-range filtering.

\n\n

API Access

The audit log is accessible via the admin API, allowing you to build custom dashboards or integrate with external compliance tools. Filter by user, resource type, action, and date range using query parameters.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.2772Z","69dc73de-b83c-42c9-bca4-31da2b762543","Audit Log | Cartly Help Center","audit-log","Audit Log","2026-10-06T07:41:10.676968Z",{"_1551":2812,"_1561":2816,"_1554":2817,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2818,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2819,"_1572":1636,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2820,"_1577":2821},[2813],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2814},{"_1555":2815},"

Custom Fields for Products, Collections, and More

Custom Data lets you store extra information on your products, collections, orders, and customers beyond Cartly's built-in fields. For example, you could add a \"Material\" field to every product or a \"Lead Time\" field to collections.

\n\n

What Are Metafields?

Metafields are key-value pairs attached to a Cartly entity. A product could have a metafield in the custom namespace with the key material and the value 100% cotton. You decide the structure; Cartly stores and validates the data.

\n\n

Setting Up a Field Definition

Navigate to Settings → Custom Data and select the entity type (Products, Collections, Orders, or Customers). Click Add Definition and fill in:

Name — Human-readable label shown in the admin (e.g., \"Material\")
Namespace — A grouping prefix, usually custom for your own fields
Key — The field identifier used in Liquid and the API (e.g., material)
Type — The data type: text, number, boolean, date, color, URL, file, or a reference to another product/collection/metaobject

Once a definition exists, Cartly validates every value written to that field. For example, a number_integer field will reject a text value.

\n\n

Editing Metafield Values

After defining fields, they appear at the bottom of every product (or collection, order, customer) edit page. Simply fill them in and save as normal.

\n\n

Using Metafields in Your Theme

Metafields are available in Liquid templates as {{ product.metafields.custom.material }}. Install a theme that references custom fields, or add the output to your Liquid sections manually.

\n\n

What Are Metaobjects?

Metaobjects are custom content types — like a mini CMS for structured records. Navigate to Content → Custom Content to create a definition (e.g., \"Designer Profile\") with multiple typed fields, then add entries (e.g., one entry per designer). You can link products to designer entries via a metaobject_reference metafield.

\n\n

Metaobject Use Cases

Designer or brand profiles linked to products
Size guide tables with columns and rows
FAQ entries displayed on product pages
Testimonials or team member profiles

\n\n

API and GraphQL Access

Metafields and metaobjects are accessible via the Cartly REST API and GraphQL Storefront API, making them available to custom storefronts and third-party apps.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.297807Z","9e227c70-1798-4c82-8ae4-2b3db6bceb3c","Custom Data — Metafields | Cartly Help Center","custom-data-metafields","Adding Custom Data to Products and Collections","2026-10-06T07:41:10.72573Z",{"_1551":2823,"_1561":2827,"_1554":2828,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2829,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2830,"_1572":1649,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2831,"_1577":2832},[2824],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2825},{"_1555":2826},"

What are Inventory Locations?

Inventory Locations let you track stock separately for each warehouse, retail store, or fulfillment center. Instead of a single inventory number per product, you can see exactly how much stock is available at each location.

Adding a Location

Go to Settings → Inventory Locations
Click Add Location
Enter a name, address, and optionally set it as your default location
Click Create Location

Viewing Stock per Location

Click the ↓ button on any location card to expand the inventory levels table showing available and reserved quantities per SKU.

Transferring Stock

Click the ⇄ button on a location card to open the Transfer modal. Enter the variant ID, source and destination locations, and quantity to move.

Fulfillment

When you fulfill an order with multiple active locations, a location picker appears in the fulfillment dialog so you can choose which warehouse ships the order.

Deleting a Location

A location can only be deleted when all inventory levels at that location are zero. Zero out stock first, then delete.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.311941Z","96cb3a0e-e496-45ac-a92f-8ce0428d4a22","Managing Inventory Locations | Cartly Help Center","inventory-locations","Managing Inventory Locations","2026-10-06T07:41:10.79251Z",{"_1551":2834,"_1561":2838,"_1554":2839,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2840,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2841,"_1572":1662,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2842,"_1577":2843},[2835],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2836},{"_1555":2837},"

What are Checkout Functions?

Checkout Functions let you build custom business logic that runs automatically during checkout. You can apply discounts, filter shipping rates, hide payment methods, and block orders that don't meet your requirements — all without code.

Function Types

Discount Calculate — Apply percentage or fixed discounts based on cart conditions
Shipping Filter & Sort — Hide, rename, or reorder shipping rates
Payment Customization — Hide or reorder payment methods
Checkout Validate — Block checkout with a custom error message

Creating a Function

Go to Marketing → Checkout Functions in your admin panel
Click New Function and choose a function type
Build your conditions using the Rule Builder (e.g. \"Cart subtotal is greater than $50\")
Add actions (e.g. \"Apply 10% discount\")
Click Save and toggle the function Active

Testing a Function

Use the Test panel on the function edit page to simulate a cart and see which operations your function returns without affecting live orders.

Checkout Branding

Customize the look of your checkout at Online Store → Checkout Branding. Set primary colors, button styles, corner radius, and typography.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.323066Z","e48a6a24-df24-4844-aebd-34d57d62a3e5","Checkout Functions | Cartly Help Center","checkout-functions","Checkout Functions: Customize Discounts, Shipping & Payments","2026-10-06T07:41:10.820128Z",{"_1551":2845,"_1561":2849,"_1554":2850,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2851,"_1568":2852,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2853,"_1572":1754,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2854,"_1577":2855},[2846],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2847},{"_1555":2848},"

Getting Started

AI translations are available from the Translations tab on any product, collection, page, or blog article.

Translating a Field

Open a product and go to the Translations tab
Select the locale you want to translate into
Click the sparkle (✨) button next to any field
Choose Translate (keeps your original meaning) or Generate (AI creates SEO-optimized text)
Review the result in the dialog and click Save

Supported Languages

15 languages including English, Russian, German, French, Spanish, Ukrainian, Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Arabic, Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Polish, and Turkish.

Billing Limits

Translation character limits depend on your plan. Upgrade to translate more content each month. If you reach your limit you will see a quota exceeded message — no partial translations will be saved.

Tips

Use Translate mode for product titles and descriptions to preserve your brand voice
Use Generate mode for SEO Title and SEO Description to get search-optimized copy in each language
Translations appear automatically on your storefront when a visitor's browser locale or selected market matches

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.326205Z","34dda17b-298a-43f3-a085-74caa050eade","Translate your products, collections and pages into 15 languages using AI directly from the product edit page.","AI Translations | Cartly Help Center","ai-translations","Using AI Translations for Your Store","2026-10-06T07:41:10.831183Z",{"_1551":2857,"_1561":2861,"_1554":2862,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2863,"_1568":2864,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2865,"_1572":1766,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2866,"_1577":2867},[2858],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2859},{"_1555":2860},"

Overview

Cartly's Conversion Analytics tracks the key stages of your customers' purchase journey. The funnel visualization on your Analytics dashboard shows where customers drop off so you can prioritize improvements.

\n\n

The Conversion Funnel

Four events are tracked automatically — no code required:

View — A product page was viewed
Add to Cart — A product was added to the cart
Checkout — A customer started the checkout process
Purchase — An order was completed successfully

\n\n

Reading the Dashboard

Go to Admin → Analytics
Find the Conversion Funnel card

The funnel shows the count for each stage and the conversion rate between stages. For example: 1,200 views → 340 add-to-carts (28%) → 180 checkouts (53%) → 140 purchases (78%).

\n\n

Interpreting the Data

Low view → add-to-cart rate — Product pages may need better photos, clearer pricing, or more compelling descriptions
Low add-to-cart → checkout rate — Cart abandonment is high; consider abandoned cart recovery emails
Low checkout → purchase rate — Checkout friction; review shipping costs, payment options, and checkout UX

\n\n

Date Range

Use the date range selector at the top of the Analytics page to filter the funnel to a specific time period. Comparing date ranges helps you measure the impact of promotions or store changes.

\n\n

Notes

Events are tracked per-shop. Data is not shared between shops.
Bot traffic and admin views are excluded from funnel counts.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.350965Z","3146b41f-b1da-473e-8bfc-d0be496e6769","Understand your store's conversion funnel — from product views to purchases — using Cartly's built-in analytics dashboard.","Conversion Analytics | Cartly Help Center","conversion-analytics","Conversion Analytics & Funnel Tracking","2026-10-06T07:41:10.869907Z",{"_1551":2869,"_1561":2873,"_1554":2874,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2875,"_1568":2876,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2877,"_1572":2535,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2878,"_1577":2879},[2870],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2871},{"_1555":2872},"

What Is BYOE?

By default, Cartly sends all transactional emails (order confirmations, shipping updates, customer account emails) from the platform's own email address. With Bring Your Own Email (BYOE), you can configure your own email provider so that these emails come from your store's own domain — for example, orders@mystore.com instead of noreply@cartly.pro.

BYOE helps with brand consistency, deliverability, and keeps your customers' email conversations in your own domain.

\n\n

Supported Providers

SMTP — any mail server that accepts SMTP connections (Gmail, Zoho, your hosting provider's SMTP, Postfix, etc.)
SendGrid — using a SendGrid API key
Resend — using a Resend API key
Mailgun — using a Mailgun API key and domain
Amazon SES — using SES SMTP credentials

\n\n

Configure Your Email Provider

In your admin, go to Settings → Email.
Choose your Provider type from the dropdown.
Fill in the required fields:\n
- SMTP: Host, Port (25, 465, 587, or 2525), Username, Password, and whether to use TLS. Common ports: 587 for STARTTLS (most providers), 465 for implicit TLS (SMTPS), 25 for legacy.
- API providers (SendGrid, Resend, Mailgun, SES): API key and, for Mailgun, the sending domain.
\n
Set the From name (e.g. \"My Store\") and From address (e.g. orders@mystore.com).
Optionally set a Reply-To address — where customer replies should go (e.g. support@mystore.com).
Click Test Connection to verify that Cartly can reach your mail server. A confirmation email is sent to the From address.
Click Save.

\n\n

Fallback Behaviour

If no custom provider is configured, or if the custom provider fails after retries, Cartly falls back to the platform's own Resend account and sends from noreply@cartly.pro. Your customers will still receive their emails — delivery is never blocked by a misconfigured provider.

\n\n

Which Emails Use BYOE?

All transactional emails sent by your store go through BYOE when configured:

Order confirmation emails
Shipping update and fulfillment emails
Customer account creation and password reset emails
Registration email verification
Return request and refund emails
Gift card emails

Platform-level emails (billing receipts, platform announcements) always come from the platform's own address regardless of BYOE settings.

\n\n

Deliverability Tips

Set up SPF and DKIM records for your sending domain. Most email providers give you these records to add to your DNS. Without them, your emails may land in spam.
Use port 587 with STARTTLS for SMTP — it is the recommended submission port for most modern SMTP services.
Avoid using personal email addresses (Gmail, Yahoo) as your From address for high-volume sending — use a business email on your own domain.

\n\n

Removing Your Custom Provider

To revert to the platform default, go to Settings → Email, click Remove configuration, and save. All future emails will be sent from noreply@cartly.pro.

","2026-06-20T09:27:39.94082Z","5cddd996-be24-4fea-8e0c-c3824205093d","Configure your own SMTP or email API provider in Cartly so transactional and order emails send from your store's own domain, not the platform default.","Send Store Emails from Your Own Address (BYOE) | Cartly Help Center","send-store-emails-from-your-own-address","Send Store Emails from Your Own Address (BYOE)","2026-10-06T07:41:11.126818Z",{"_1551":2881,"_1561":2885,"_1554":2886,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2887,"_1568":2888,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2889,"_1572":2535,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2890,"_1577":2891},[2882],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2883},{"_1555":2884},"

Inviting a Team Member

Go to Settings → Team in your admin panel.
Click Invite team member.
Enter the teammate's email address and click Send Invitation.

An email is sent immediately with an accept link. The link is valid for 7 days.

\n\n

Accepting an Invitation

The teammate clicks the link in the email. If they already have a Cartly account with that email address, they are prompted to log in and then automatically added to your store. If they do not have an account, they are taken through a short registration flow before joining.

After accepting, the teammate appears in the Team members list with a Staff role.

\n\n

Managing Pending Invitations

While an invitation is waiting to be accepted, it appears in the Pending Invitations section on the Team settings page. You can:

Resend — sends the invitation email again (useful if the original email was not received or expired).
Revoke — immediately invalidates the invitation link. If the teammate clicks the link after it is revoked, they see an error message and cannot join.

\n\n

Changing a Team Member's Role

After a member accepts the invitation, you can change their role from the Team members list. Click the member's name, select a new role from the dropdown, and save. Available roles: Owner, Manager, Staff, and Viewer.

\n\n

Removing a Team Member

To remove a member: go to Settings → Team, click their name, and click Remove from store. Their access is revoked immediately. The member's Cartly account is not deleted — they just lose access to your store.

\n\n

How Many Staff Members Can I Have?

The number of staff accounts depends on your plan. Check Settings → Billing to see your current limit. If you need more than your plan allows, upgrade from the Billing page.

\n\n

Security Notes

Invitation links are single-use and expire after 7 days.
Revoking an invitation immediately invalidates the link — no further action is needed.
Staff members can log in with their own password and TOTP (two-factor authentication) if enabled on their account.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.423112Z","2899fd82-4bf8-4233-8cae-8ebc98256337","Invite teammates to your Cartly admin. Send email invitations, manage pending invites, and revoke access — all from Settings → Team.","Invite Staff Members | Cartly Help Center","team-invite-staff","Invite Staff Members to Your Store","2026-10-06T07:41:11.063261Z",{"_1551":2893,"_1561":2897,"_1554":2898,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2899,"_1568":2900,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2901,"_1572":1779,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2902,"_1577":2903},[2894],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2895},{"_1555":2896},"

What Is Social Login?

Social login lets you sign in to your Cartly admin panel using an existing Google or GitHub account. Instead of typing your email and password, you click \"Continue with Google\" or \"Continue with GitHub\" on the login page and are taken through that provider's own sign-in flow.

\n\n

Requirements

You must already have a Cartly account. Social login links to an existing account — it does not create a new one.
The email address on your Google or GitHub account must match the email address registered on your Cartly account.
Your account must not have two-factor authentication (2FA / TOTP) enabled. If 2FA is active, continue signing in with your email and password.
The platform operator must have enabled the relevant provider at Platform → Settings → Auth Providers. If the buttons do not appear on the login page, social login has not been enabled for your platform.

\n\n

How to Sign In with Google

Go to your admin login page (e.g. yourstore.mycartly.pro/admin/login).
Click Continue with Google.
You are redirected to Google's sign-in page. Select or sign in to the Google account whose email matches your Cartly account.
After Google confirms your identity, you are returned to your admin panel and signed in.

\n\n

How to Sign In with GitHub

Go to your admin login page.
Click Continue with GitHub.
You are redirected to GitHub. If you are already signed in to GitHub in your browser, you may be taken directly back without re-entering credentials.
If prompted, confirm that you want Cartly to verify your email. After GitHub confirms your identity, you are returned to your admin panel and signed in.

\n\n

What Happens If My Email Does Not Match?

If the email associated with your Google or GitHub account does not match any Cartly account, you are redirected to the registration page instead of being signed in. Create a new Cartly account with that email address, or contact the platform to update the email on your existing account.

\n\n

Troubleshooting

The Google / GitHub buttons do not appear — social login has not been configured for your platform. Contact your platform operator.
Redirected to registration even though I have an account — the email on your Google / GitHub account does not match your Cartly account email. Check both emails and use the matching one.
I have 2FA enabled — can I use social login? — Not yet. Sign in with email and password as usual. Social login is not available for accounts with two-factor authentication active.

","2026-06-28T05:43:33.076278Z","4171728d-46b3-443b-b978-635de8d99c9d","How to sign in to your Cartly admin panel using your Google or GitHub account instead of an email and password.","Sign In with Google or GitHub | Cartly Help Center","sign-in-with-google-github","Sign In with Google or GitHub","2026-10-06T07:41:11.138425Z",{"_1551":2905,"_1561":2909,"_1554":2910,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2911,"_1568":2912,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2913,"_1572":2427,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2914,"_1577":2915},[2906],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2907},{"_1555":2908},"

What Is Multi-Currency?

Multi-Currency lets visitors to your storefront see prices in their preferred currency. Cartly automatically fetches live exchange rates from OpenExchangeRates every six hours and applies them to all active currencies. You can also add a markup percentage to each currency to cover bank conversion fees, and choose a rounding rule so prices look clean (e.g. €28.99 instead of €28.43).

\n\n

How to Activate Multi-Currency

Go to Settings → Currencies in your admin panel.
Click Add Currency and select a currency from the list.
Choose the mode:\n
- Automatic — Cartly fetches and updates the rate from OpenExchangeRates automatically every 6 hours.
- Manual — you enter the exchange rate yourself and update it when needed.
\n
Optionally set a Markup % (0–25%) to add a buffer for currency conversion fees charged by your payment processor.
Choose a Rounding strategy:\n
- Nearest .99 — e.g. €18.40 becomes €17.99
- Nearest .95 — e.g. €18.40 becomes €17.95
- Nearest whole — e.g. €18.40 becomes €18
- None — show the raw converted amount
\n
Toggle the currency to Active and save.

\n\n

Force-Refreshing Rates

If you want to update all automatic rates immediately (for example, before a big sale), click the Refresh Rates button at the top of the Currencies page. Rates are updated within a few seconds. This action is rate-limited — you can trigger it up to 5 times per minute.

\n\n

The Stale Rate Warning

If a rate has not been updated in more than 24 hours, a warning banner appears on your storefront next to the currency picker. This is informational — your prices are still shown, but visitors know the rate may be slightly outdated.

\n\n

The Currency Picker on Your Storefront

The Minimal theme includes a built-in currency picker in the storefront header. Visitors select their currency once; the choice is saved in a cookie and persists across pages and sessions. If you use a different theme, contact your theme developer to add the currency picker using the shop.fx_context Liquid variable.

\n\n

Zero-Decimal Currencies (JPY, KRW, etc.)

Currencies like Japanese yen (JPY), South Korean won (KRW), and Hungarian forint (HUF) do not use decimal places. Cartly detects these automatically and skips the decimal rounding step — a ¥3,714 price will never become ¥3,799 due to a rounding rule applied incorrectly.

\n\n

Notes

Your base currency (the currency your products are priced in) cannot be removed.
You can add up to 50 currencies per shop.
Multi-Currency is available on all paid plans.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.435519Z","2e08193a-23a6-4baf-b74e-3c1811b73e8e","How to activate multi-currency support and configure automatic exchange rates, per-currency markup, and rounding for your Cartly storefront.","Set Up Automatic Exchange Rates | Cartly Help Center","set-up-automatic-exchange-rates","Set Up Automatic Exchange Rates","2026-10-06T07:41:11.077037Z",{"_1551":2917,"_1561":2921,"_1554":2922,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2923,"_1568":2924,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2925,"_1572":2926,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2927,"_1577":2928},[2918],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2919},{"_1555":2920},"

What Is a Market?

A Market is a group of countries that share a currency, language, and tax policy. When a visitor arrives at your storefront, Cartly detects their country automatically and shows them the right prices, language, and tax treatment for their market.

Every store starts with one Primary Market. The Primary Market is the fallback for visitors from countries not covered by any other market. It cannot be deleted or deactivated.

\n\n

Create a New Market

Go to Settings → Markets in your admin panel.
Click Add Market.
Give the market a name (e.g. \"Europe\").
Select the countries that belong to this market.
Choose the Base Currency for this market (e.g. EUR).
Set the Default Language — the language shown to visitors by default in this market.
Optionally add more Available Languages — visitors can switch between them using the language switcher on your storefront.
Choose the Tax Mode:\n
- Tax Inclusive (VAT-style) — the price you set already includes tax. At checkout, Cartly calculates how much of the total is tax. Use this for European VAT markets.
- Tax Exclusive (sales-tax style) — the price shown does not include tax. Tax is added at checkout. Use this for US-style sales tax markets.
\n
Choose the Duty Mode:\n
- DDP (Delivery Duty Paid) — your store covers import duties. Customers see a final all-inclusive price.
- DDU (Delivery Duty Unpaid) — the buyer pays duties when the package is delivered.
\n
Save the market and set it to Active.

\n\n

Setting a Market as Primary

If you want to change which market is the primary one, open the market you want to promote and click Set as Primary Market. A confirmation dialog will explain the impact on translations before the change takes effect.

Note: The primary market's default language is used as the source language for translations across your store. If you promote a non-English market to primary, existing English translations will become inactive until you provide new source-language translations.

\n\n

Per-Country Language Switcher

If a market has multiple available languages, a language switcher appears in the storefront header. Visitors can switch between languages. Their choice is saved in a cookie for future visits. Language names are shown in each language's own script (\"Deutsch\", \"русский\", \"ქართული\").

\n\n

Notes

A country can only belong to one market at a time.
Removing a language from a market does not delete your existing translations — it only removes the language from the storefront switcher.
Markets require the Multi-Currency feature to be active if the market uses a currency different from your base currency.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.43888Z","b47df819-e552-4054-baea-10f22c412671","How to set up country-specific markets in Cartly — per-market currency, language, tax treatment, and duty mode for international selling.","Create Your First Market | Cartly Help Center","create-your-first-market",115,"Create Your First Market","2026-10-06T07:41:11.083816Z",{"_1551":2930,"_1561":2934,"_1554":2935,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2936,"_1568":2937,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2938,"_1572":2939,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2940,"_1577":2941},[2931],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2932},{"_1555":2933},"

What Are Metaobjects?

Metaobjects let you create your own custom content types — a Designer profile, a FAQ item, a Store location — and display them anywhere in your Liquid theme. Unlike product metafields (which add extra data to a product), Metaobjects are standalone records you design from scratch.

Two concepts to know:

Definition — the schema: the type name and the list of fields (e.g. a \"Designer\" definition with fields: name, bio, photo, portfolio_url).
Entry — one record filling in that schema (e.g. the entry for \"Alice Chen\" with her name, bio, photo, and URL).

\n\n

Create a Definition

Go to Content → Metaobjects in your admin.
Click Add Definition.
Enter a type name (snake_case, e.g. designer) and a display name (e.g. \"Designer\").
Choose access: Public (entries queryable via the storefront) or Admin Only (entries visible only in the admin).
Add fields using the Add Field button. Each field has a type, a key (snake_case), and a label.
Optionally drag fields to reorder them — the order is what merchants see in the entry form.
Save the definition.

\n\n

Field Types Available

Single-line text, Multi-line text — for short or long plain text
Rich text — a WYSIWYG editor for formatted content (bold, italic, links, headings, lists)
Integer, Decimal, Money — for numbers and prices
Boolean — a toggle (yes/no)
Date, Date & Time — date pickers
URL, Color — validated inputs
File / Image — opens the media library to pick an uploaded image or file
Product, Collection — search and select from your store catalog
Page — pick a CMS page by title
Metaobject — reference an entry from another (or the same) definition
List of … — array variant of any type above (e.g. \"List of Products\" for a curated product list)

\n\n

Field Validations

Two optional validations make fields smarter:

Choices — restrict a text field to a fixed list of options (e.g. \"S\", \"M\", \"L\"). The entry form shows a dropdown instead of a free-text input, preventing inconsistent values.
Metaobject type — required for Metaobject reference fields. Specifies which definition type to pull entries from when picking a reference.

\n\n

Create and Edit Entries

Open the definition and click Add Entry.
Fill in the fields. Each field type has a dedicated input — rich text opens an editor, image fields open the media picker, product/collection fields let you search your catalog.
Set the Status: Active (visible on storefront), Draft, or Archived.
Click Save.

\n\n

Managing Entries

The entries list supports:

Status tabs — switch between Active, Draft, and Archived views.
Search — filter entries by handle.
Sort — by created date, updated date, or handle.
Bulk actions — select multiple entries, then delete them all or change their status in one step.
Inline toggle — flip an entry's status directly from the list without opening it.

\n\n

Row Actions on Each Entry

Duplicate — clones the entry. The new handle gets a -copy suffix so the original is unaffected.
JSON view — shows the raw API representation of the entry. Useful for debugging or copying values to use in integrations.
Storefront usage — scans your active Liquid templates to show which sections and snippets reference this entry's handle. Review this before archiving or deleting a live entry.

\n\n

Export Entries

Click Export in the entries list toolbar. Choose JSON (full field objects, good for re-importing or processing in code) or CSV (flat columns, good for spreadsheets). The file downloads immediately.

\n\n

Display Entries in Your Theme

Entries are available in any Liquid template via metaobjects.TYPE.entries:

{% for designer in metaobjects.designer.entries %}\n  <div>\n    <h3>{{ designer.fields.name }}</h3>\n    <p>{{ designer.fields.bio }}</p>\n  </div>\n{% endfor %}

Up to 50 entries per type are available in a single Liquid render (250 total across all types). For larger lists, use the Storefront API.

Admin-only definitions return an empty list on the storefront — their entries are never exposed to customers.

\n\n

Notes

The type name cannot be changed after the definition is created.
Deleting a definition deletes all its entries permanently. Use the Storefront usage scanner first to check for live references.
Metaobjects are also queryable via the GraphQL Storefront API for headless storefronts.

","2026-06-20T09:26:27.87878Z","01b1d66c-fe84-4533-91d3-21dd8e0ecf0c","How to create custom content types (Metaobjects) in Cartly — define a schema, add entries using the full editor, and display them in your storefront theme.","Building Custom Content with Metaobjects | Cartly Help Center","building-custom-content-with-metaobjects",125,"Building Custom Content with Metaobjects","2026-10-06T07:41:11.107599Z",{"_1551":2943,"_1561":2947,"_1554":2948,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2949,"_1568":2950,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2951,"_1572":2750,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2952,"_1577":2953},[2944],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2945},{"_1555":2946},"

What Is Pickup-Point Delivery?

Pickup-point delivery lets your customers collect their order from a nearby pickup point or parcel locker instead of waiting for door delivery. For many shoppers this is faster, and it can also reduce your delivery costs compared to door-to-door service.

\n\n

Connecting a Delivery Carrier

To offer pickup-point delivery, connect a delivery carrier from App Store → Apps. Once connected, the carrier's live shipping rates — including any pickup-point or parcel-locker options it supports — become available at checkout alongside your existing shipping zones and rates.

\n\n

Controlling Which Options Appear

You decide which delivery options and tariffs are shown to shoppers. Review the carrier's connection settings in Settings → Apps & Integrations to enable or disable specific delivery options, so checkout only ever shows the choices that make sense for your store.

\n\n

The Checkout Experience

At checkout, a shopper who qualifies for pickup-point delivery sees it as an option alongside standard door delivery. Choosing a pickup point lets them browse a map or list of nearby locations and select the one that is most convenient for them.

\n\n

Creating a Shipment and Waybill

Once an order is placed, open the order in your admin and click the shipment action on the order page. This creates the carrier shipment in one click and generates a printable waybill you can attach to the package. You do not need to open a separate carrier dashboard.

\n\n

Tracking Delivery Status

After a shipment is created, delivery status updates flow back to Cartly automatically through the carrier's webhooks and are shown directly on the order — no manual status checks required.

\n\n

Why a Phone Number Is Required

Cartly now requires a contact phone number on the shipping address for every buyer. Carriers use this number to reach the recipient, particularly for pickup-point and parcel-locker deliveries, which reduces failed or delayed deliveries.

","2026-07-13T17:34:21.83481Z","2b215db7-fcbd-4691-9a10-dd263b2dcf0e","Connect a delivery carrier so shoppers can choose a pickup point or parcel locker at checkout, and create shipments with printable waybills from the order page.","Pickup-point delivery at checkout | Cartly Help","pickup-point-delivery-at-checkout","Offering pickup-point and parcel-locker delivery at checkout","2026-10-06T07:41:11.16306Z",{"_1551":2955,"_1561":2959,"_1554":2960,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2961,"_1568":2962,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2963,"_1572":2762,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2964,"_1577":2965},[2956],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2957},{"_1555":2958},"

Overview

Account verification lets the platform confirm the details behind your store. If verification is requested, you'll see a banner in your admin pointing you to the verification page.

\n\n

Uploading Your Documents

Go to Admin → Settings → Verification
Upload the documents requested by the platform
Submit for review

Once submitted, your documents are reviewed by the platform. The review status is reflected on the verification page and in the admin banner.

\n\n

Verification Statuses

Required — verification documents have been requested and are not yet submitted
Pending review — documents were submitted and are awaiting review
Rejected — the submitted documents were not accepted; re-upload to try again
Approved — verification is complete

\n\n

How Your Account State Affects Your Store

Your store moves through a graduated set of states rather than being switched on or off all at once:

Active — everything works normally
Checkout paused — the storefront and admin remain available, but checkout is temporarily paused for shoppers
Frozen — the storefront is paused and the admin becomes read-only; you can still view and export your data
Restricted — the most limited state, applied only in exceptional cases

Your admin and your storefront show matching messaging for whichever state applies, so you and your shoppers always know what to expect. Completing verification is usually the fastest way to move a store back toward the active state.

\n\n

Notes

Only the platform reviews and approves verification documents — there is no self-service approval
Keep your documents current; the platform may request updated documents periodically

","2026-07-24T05:48:32.452988Z","fcd7bb1e-91e1-4bbf-9e91-3e902d65c988","Upload verification documents from your admin, and see how account states — active, checkout paused, frozen, restricted — affect your store.","Account Verification | Cartly Help Center","account-verification","Account Verification","2026-10-06T07:41:11.175508Z",{"_1551":2967,"_1561":2971,"_1554":2972,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2973,"_1568":2974,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2975,"_1572":2976,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2977,"_1577":2978},[2968],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2969},{"_1555":2970},"

The Cartly admin panel is available in six languages: English, German, Spanish, French, Ukrainian, and Russian. You can change it at any time — the choice applies only to your own account.

Switching your language

Open the admin panel and look at the bottom of the left sidebar.
Click the language switcher and choose the language you want.
The panel reloads in your chosen language right away.

What changes — and what does not

Your language choice is saved to your account, so it follows you to every device where you sign in. It changes the interface only: menus, buttons, labels, and messages. Numbers and plural forms also follow your language's conventions.

Content you have entered yourself — product titles and descriptions, collection names, pages, and theme text — is never translated automatically. It is always shown exactly as you wrote it. To offer your storefront in more than one language for shoppers, use the cross-border storefront and translation tools instead, which are separate from the admin panel language.

Team members

Each staff member chooses their own admin language independently. Changing yours does not affect anyone else on your team.

","2026-08-12T06:24:02.288595Z","d9c371eb-a28f-49c4-98ea-13e2511f1c80","Switch the Cartly admin panel to English, German, Spanish, French, Ukrainian, or Russian, and learn how your language choice is saved.","Changing Your Admin Language | Cartly Help Center","changing-your-admin-language",150,"Changing your admin panel language","2026-10-06T07:41:11.181691Z",{"_1544":2980,"_1546":2981,"_1548":2982},"import-export","Import & Export",[2983,2994],{"_1551":2984,"_1561":2988,"_1554":2989,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2990,"_1570":2980,"_1544":2991,"_1572":1573,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2992,"_1577":2993},[2985],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2986},{"_1555":2987},"

Importing Data via CSV

Cartly's import system allows you to bulk-add or update products using CSV files. The import process is powered by Temporal workflows for reliability and progress tracking.

\n\n

Preparing Your CSV File

Your CSV file should follow these guidelines:

Use UTF-8 encoding to support international characters
Include a header row with column names
Use commas as delimiters (not semicolons or tabs)
Wrap values containing commas in double quotes
One row per variant (group rows by product title for multi-variant products)

\n\n

Required Columns

At minimum, your CSV needs:

title — The product name. This is the grouping key for variants.
price — The selling price in decimal format (e.g., 29.99)

All other columns are optional but recommended for complete product data.

\n\n

Upload Process

Navigate to Products → Import
Select your CSV file (drag and drop or click to browse)
Cartly parses the file and shows a preview of the first 5 rows
Map each CSV column to a Cartly product field. If your column names match the expected names, mapping is automatic.
Review the mapping and click Start Import

\n\n

Import Progress

Once started, the import runs as a background Temporal workflow. You can:

View real-time progress (processed / total rows)
See counts of created, updated, and failed rows
Navigate away and come back — the import continues in the background

\n\n

Error Handling

Rows that fail validation are skipped and logged with specific error messages. Common errors include:

Missing required fields (title, price)
Invalid price format
Duplicate SKUs within the same import
Image URL download failures

After the import completes, download a CSV of failed rows, fix the issues, and re-import just those rows.

\n\n

Update vs. Create

If a product with the same title (or handle, if specified) already exists, the import updates it instead of creating a duplicate. This allows you to use CSV imports for bulk price updates, inventory adjustments, or adding new fields to existing products.

\n\n

Performance

Imports process rows in configurable batches (default: 100). A typical 5,000-row file completes in about one minute. The Temporal workflow ensures that even if the server restarts during processing, the import resumes from the last completed batch.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.282129Z","ec8467c9-31ea-4086-aa08-64f0f5fc0e14","CSV Import | Cartly Help Center","csv-import","CSV Import","2026-10-06T07:41:10.703078Z",{"_1551":2995,"_1561":2999,"_1554":3000,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":3001,"_1570":2980,"_1544":3002,"_1572":1600,"_1574":1575,"_1546":3003,"_1577":3004},[2996],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":2997},{"_1555":2998},"

Saving Import Profiles

Import profiles let you save column mappings for reuse, making repeated imports from the same source fast and consistent.

\n\n

What Is an Import Profile?

An import profile stores the mapping between your CSV columns and Cartly product fields. Instead of manually mapping columns every time you import, select a saved profile and the mapping is applied automatically. This is especially useful when you regularly import from the same supplier or ERP system.

\n\n

Creating a Profile

During any CSV import, after mapping your columns, click Save as Profile. Enter a descriptive name (e.g., \"Supplier A Products\", \"Weekly Inventory Update\") and save. The profile stores:

Column-to-field mappings
Default values for unmapped fields
Import behavior settings (create only, update only, or both)

\n\n

Using a Profile

On the import page, select a saved profile from the dropdown before uploading your CSV. When you upload the file, Cartly automatically applies the stored mappings. Review the preview to confirm everything looks correct, then start the import.

\n\n

Editing Profiles

Navigate to Products → Import → Profiles to view all saved profiles. Click a profile to edit its mappings, rename it, or delete it. Changes to a profile do not affect past imports — only future imports using that profile.

\n\n

Profile Use Cases

Supplier imports — Your supplier sends a CSV with their column names (part_number, wholesale_price, qty_available). Map these once and reuse the profile for every shipment.
Inventory updates — Create a profile that maps just SKU and quantity columns for quick stock updates without touching other product fields.
Price updates — Map SKU and price columns to update pricing across your catalog from a spreadsheet.
Migration — When migrating from another platform, create a profile that maps their export format to Cartly fields.

\n\n

Sharing Profiles

Profiles are shared across all team members with import permissions. Any team member can use, edit, or delete a profile. This ensures consistency when multiple people handle product imports.

\n\n

Import History

Every import is recorded with its profile, file name, date, results (created/updated/failed counts), and the team member who ran it. View import history in Products → Import → History to track all past imports and their outcomes.

","2026-06-05T11:51:11.287795Z","196c0c0a-8872-4354-bac5-c52b9d8bcce2","Import Profiles | Cartly Help Center","import-profiles","Import Profiles","2026-10-06T07:41:10.715804Z","allPages",[3007,3011,3015,3019,3023,3027,3033,3037,3041,3045,3049,3053,3057,3061,3065,3069,3073,3077,3081,3085,3091,3095,3099,3103,3107,3111,3115,3119,3123,3127,3131,3135,3139,3143,3147,3153,3157,3161,3165,3169,3173,3177,3181,3185,3189,3193,3197,3201,3205,3211,3215,3219,3223,3227,3231,3235,3239,3243,3247,3251,3255,3259,3263,3267,3273,3277,3281,3285,3289,3293,3297,3301,3307,3311,3315,3319,3323,3327,3331,3335,3339,3343,3347,3353,3357,3361,3367,3371,3375,3379,3383,3387,3391,3395,3399,3403,3407,3411,3415,3421,3425,3429,3433,3437,3441,3445,3449,3453,3459,3463,3467,3471,3475,3479,3483,3487,3491,3495,3499,3503,3507,3511,3515,3519,3523,3527,3531,3535,3539,3543],{"_1551":3008,"_1561":1674,"_1554":1675,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1676,"_1570":1666,"_1544":1677,"_1572":1573,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1678,"_1577":1679},[3009],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3010},{"_1555":1673},{"_1551":3012,"_1561":2294,"_1554":2295,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2296,"_1570":2286,"_1544":2297,"_1572":1573,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2298,"_1577":2299},[3013],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3014},{"_1555":2293},{"_1551":3016,"_1561":2988,"_1554":2989,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2990,"_1570":2980,"_1544":2991,"_1572":1573,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2992,"_1577":2993},[3017],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3018},{"_1555":2987},{"_1551":3020,"_1561":1908,"_1554":1909,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1910,"_1570":1900,"_1544":1911,"_1572":1573,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1912,"_1577":1913},[3021],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3022},{"_1555":1907},{"_1551":3024,"_1561":2772,"_1554":2773,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2774,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2775,"_1572":1573,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2776,"_1577":2777},[3025],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3026},{"_1555":2771},{"_1551":-5,"_1561":3028,"_1554":3029,"_1564":1565,"_1566":3030,"_1568":3031,"_1570":1567,"_1544":1545,"_1572":1573,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1547,"_1577":3032},"2026-06-05T11:51:11.038743Z","30459000-2929-4cac-a215-1f781c6896eb","Learn the basics of setting up and running your Cartly store","Getting Started | Cartly Help Center","2026-10-06T07:41:10.078928Z",{"_1551":3034,"_1561":2571,"_1554":2572,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2573,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2574,"_1572":1573,"_1574":1575,"_1546":336,"_1577":2575},[3035],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3036},{"_1555":2570},{"_1551":3038,"_1561":1562,"_1554":1563,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1569,"_1570":1545,"_1544":1571,"_1572":1573,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1576,"_1577":1578},[3039],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3040},{"_1555":1560},{"_1551":3042,"_1561":2439,"_1554":2440,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2441,"_1570":2431,"_1544":2442,"_1572":1573,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2443,"_1577":2444},[3043],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3044},{"_1555":2438},{"_1551":3046,"_1561":1968,"_1554":1969,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1970,"_1570":1960,"_1544":1971,"_1572":1573,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1972,"_1577":1973},[3047],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3048},{"_1555":1967},{"_1551":3050,"_1561":1791,"_1554":1792,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1793,"_1570":1783,"_1544":1794,"_1572":1573,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1795,"_1577":1796},[3051],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3052},{"_1555":1790},{"_1551":3054,"_1561":1584,"_1554":1585,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1586,"_1570":1545,"_1544":1587,"_1572":1588,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1589,"_1577":1590},[3055],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3056},{"_1555":1583},{"_1551":3058,"_1561":1596,"_1554":1597,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1598,"_1570":1545,"_1544":1599,"_1572":1600,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1601,"_1577":1602},[3059],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3060},{"_1555":1595},{"_1551":3062,"_1561":1919,"_1554":1920,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1921,"_1570":1900,"_1544":1922,"_1572":1600,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1923,"_1577":1924},[3063],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3064},{"_1555":1918},{"_1551":3066,"_1561":2305,"_1554":2306,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2307,"_1570":2286,"_1544":2308,"_1572":1600,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2309,"_1577":2310},[3067],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3068},{"_1555":2304},{"_1551":3070,"_1561":2999,"_1554":3000,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":3001,"_1570":2980,"_1544":3002,"_1572":1600,"_1574":1575,"_1546":3003,"_1577":3004},[3071],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3072},{"_1555":2998},{"_1551":3074,"_1561":2581,"_1554":2582,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2583,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2584,"_1572":1600,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2585,"_1577":2586},[3075],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3076},{"_1555":2580},{"_1551":3078,"_1561":1802,"_1554":1803,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1804,"_1570":1783,"_1544":1805,"_1572":1600,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1806,"_1577":1807},[3079],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3080},{"_1555":1801},{"_1551":3082,"_1561":1685,"_1554":1686,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1687,"_1570":1666,"_1544":1688,"_1572":1600,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1689,"_1577":1690},[3083],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3084},{"_1555":1684},{"_1551":-5,"_1561":3086,"_1554":3087,"_1564":1565,"_1566":3088,"_1568":3089,"_1570":1567,"_1544":1666,"_1572":1600,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1667,"_1577":3090},"2026-06-05T11:51:11.042311Z","33328cd6-f684-4436-b0d5-1b14ad9ba286","Manage your product listings, variants, media, and collections","Products & Catalog | Cartly Help Center","2026-10-06T07:41:10.089753Z",{"_1551":3092,"_1561":2783,"_1554":2784,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2785,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2786,"_1572":1600,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2787,"_1577":2788},[3093],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3094},{"_1555":2782},{"_1551":3096,"_1561":2450,"_1554":2451,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2452,"_1570":2431,"_1544":2453,"_1572":1600,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2454,"_1577":2455},[3097],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3098},{"_1555":2449},{"_1551":3100,"_1561":1979,"_1554":1980,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1981,"_1570":1960,"_1544":1982,"_1572":1600,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1983,"_1577":1984},[3101],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3102},{"_1555":1978},{"_1551":3104,"_1561":1990,"_1554":1991,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1992,"_1570":1960,"_1544":1993,"_1572":1994,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1995,"_1577":1996},[3105],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3106},{"_1555":1989},{"_1551":3108,"_1561":2002,"_1554":2003,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2004,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2005,"_1572":2006,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2007,"_1577":2008},[3109],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3110},{"_1555":2001},{"_1551":3112,"_1561":2014,"_1554":2015,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2016,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2017,"_1572":2018,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2019,"_1577":2020},[3113],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3114},{"_1555":2013},{"_1551":3116,"_1561":2316,"_1554":2317,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2318,"_1568":2319,"_1570":2286,"_1544":2320,"_1572":1612,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2321,"_1577":2322},[3117],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3118},{"_1555":2315},{"_1551":3120,"_1561":1608,"_1554":1609,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1610,"_1570":1545,"_1544":1611,"_1572":1612,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1613,"_1577":1614},[3121],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3122},{"_1555":1607},{"_1551":3124,"_1561":2461,"_1554":2462,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2463,"_1570":2431,"_1544":2464,"_1572":1612,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2465,"_1577":2466},[3125],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3126},{"_1555":2460},{"_1551":3128,"_1561":1930,"_1554":1931,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1932,"_1570":1900,"_1544":1933,"_1572":1612,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1934,"_1577":1935},[3129],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3130},{"_1555":1929},{"_1551":3132,"_1561":2328,"_1554":2329,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2330,"_1570":2286,"_1544":2331,"_1572":1612,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2332,"_1577":2333},[3133],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3134},{"_1555":2327},{"_1551":3136,"_1561":1813,"_1554":1814,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1815,"_1570":1783,"_1544":1816,"_1572":1612,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1817,"_1577":1818},[3137],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3138},{"_1555":1812},{"_1551":3140,"_1561":2592,"_1554":2593,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2594,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2595,"_1572":1612,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2596,"_1577":2597},[3141],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3142},{"_1555":2591},{"_1551":3144,"_1561":2026,"_1554":2027,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2028,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2029,"_1572":1612,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2030,"_1577":2031},[3145],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3146},{"_1555":2025},{"_1551":-5,"_1561":3148,"_1554":3149,"_1564":1565,"_1566":3150,"_1568":3151,"_1570":1567,"_1544":1783,"_1572":1612,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1784,"_1577":3152},"2026-06-05T11:51:11.047104Z","1ca03884-6637-424e-ad6d-712de0a46091","Process orders, handle fulfillment, returns, and refunds","Orders & Fulfillment | Cartly Help Center","2026-10-06T07:41:10.097085Z",{"_1551":3154,"_1561":1696,"_1554":1697,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1698,"_1570":1666,"_1544":1699,"_1572":1612,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1700,"_1577":1701},[3155],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3156},{"_1555":1695},{"_1551":3158,"_1561":2794,"_1554":2795,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2796,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2797,"_1572":1612,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2798,"_1577":2799},[3159],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3160},{"_1555":2793},{"_1551":3162,"_1561":2037,"_1554":2038,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2039,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2040,"_1572":1612,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2041,"_1577":2042},[3163],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3164},{"_1555":2036},{"_1551":3166,"_1561":2048,"_1554":2049,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2050,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2051,"_1572":2052,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2053,"_1577":2054},[3167],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3168},{"_1555":2047},{"_1551":3170,"_1561":2060,"_1554":2061,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2062,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2063,"_1572":2064,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2065,"_1577":2066},[3171],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3172},{"_1555":2059},{"_1551":3174,"_1561":2072,"_1554":2073,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2074,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2075,"_1572":2076,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2077,"_1577":2078},[3175],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3176},{"_1555":2071},{"_1551":3178,"_1561":2084,"_1554":2085,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2086,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2087,"_1572":2088,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2089,"_1577":2090},[3179],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3180},{"_1555":2083},{"_1551":3182,"_1561":2339,"_1554":2340,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2341,"_1568":2342,"_1570":2286,"_1544":2343,"_1572":2100,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2344,"_1577":2345},[3183],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3184},{"_1555":2338},{"_1551":3186,"_1561":2096,"_1554":2097,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2098,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2099,"_1572":2100,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2101,"_1577":2102},[3187],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3188},{"_1555":2095},{"_1551":3190,"_1561":2351,"_1554":2352,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2353,"_1568":2354,"_1570":2286,"_1544":2355,"_1572":2112,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2356,"_1577":2357},[3191],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3192},{"_1555":2350},{"_1551":3194,"_1561":2108,"_1554":2109,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2110,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2111,"_1572":2112,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2113,"_1577":2114},[3195],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3196},{"_1555":2107},{"_1551":3198,"_1561":2805,"_1554":2806,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2807,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2808,"_1572":1624,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2809,"_1577":2810},[3199],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3200},{"_1555":2804},{"_1551":3202,"_1561":1707,"_1554":1708,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1709,"_1570":1666,"_1544":1710,"_1572":1624,"_1574":1575,"_1546":461,"_1577":1711},[3203],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3204},{"_1555":1706},{"_1551":-5,"_1561":3206,"_1554":3207,"_1564":1565,"_1566":3208,"_1568":3209,"_1570":1567,"_1544":1900,"_1572":1624,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1901,"_1577":3210},"2026-06-05T11:51:11.051135Z","130043de-f98c-4438-abd4-ee262dc5a3c9","Manage customer accounts, groups, and profiles","Customers | Cartly Help Center","2026-10-06T07:41:10.103677Z",{"_1551":3212,"_1561":1620,"_1554":1621,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1622,"_1570":1545,"_1544":1623,"_1572":1624,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1625,"_1577":1626},[3213],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3214},{"_1555":1619},{"_1551":3216,"_1561":2120,"_1554":2121,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2122,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2123,"_1572":1624,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2124,"_1577":2125},[3217],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3218},{"_1555":2119},{"_1551":3220,"_1561":2603,"_1554":2604,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2605,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2606,"_1572":1624,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2607,"_1577":2608},[3221],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3222},{"_1555":2602},{"_1551":3224,"_1561":1824,"_1554":1825,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1826,"_1570":1783,"_1544":1827,"_1572":1624,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1828,"_1577":1829},[3225],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3226},{"_1555":1823},{"_1551":3228,"_1561":2363,"_1554":2364,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2365,"_1570":2286,"_1544":2366,"_1572":1624,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2367,"_1577":2368},[3229],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3230},{"_1555":2362},{"_1551":3232,"_1561":2472,"_1554":2473,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2474,"_1570":2431,"_1544":2475,"_1572":1624,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2476,"_1577":2477},[3233],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3234},{"_1555":2471},{"_1551":3236,"_1561":2374,"_1554":2375,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2376,"_1568":2377,"_1570":2286,"_1544":2378,"_1572":2379,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2380,"_1577":2381},[3237],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3238},{"_1555":2373},{"_1551":3240,"_1561":2131,"_1554":2132,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2133,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2134,"_1572":1636,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2135,"_1577":2136},[3241],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3242},{"_1555":2130},{"_1551":3244,"_1561":2816,"_1554":2817,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2818,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2819,"_1572":1636,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2820,"_1577":2821},[3245],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3246},{"_1555":2815},{"_1551":3248,"_1561":1632,"_1554":1633,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1634,"_1570":1545,"_1544":1635,"_1572":1636,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1637,"_1577":1638},[3249],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3250},{"_1555":1631},{"_1551":3252,"_1561":2142,"_1554":2143,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2144,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2145,"_1572":1636,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2146,"_1577":2147},[3253],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3254},{"_1555":2141},{"_1551":3256,"_1561":1717,"_1554":1718,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1719,"_1570":1666,"_1544":1720,"_1572":1636,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1721,"_1577":1722},[3257],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3258},{"_1555":1716},{"_1551":3260,"_1561":1835,"_1554":1836,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1837,"_1570":1783,"_1544":1838,"_1572":1636,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1839,"_1577":1840},[3261],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3262},{"_1555":1834},{"_1551":3264,"_1561":2387,"_1554":2388,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2389,"_1570":2286,"_1544":2390,"_1572":1636,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2391,"_1577":2392},[3265],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3266},{"_1555":2386},{"_1551":-5,"_1561":3268,"_1554":3269,"_1564":1565,"_1566":3270,"_1568":3271,"_1570":1567,"_1544":1960,"_1572":1636,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1961,"_1577":3272},"2026-06-05T11:51:11.053672Z","41479dac-13e8-4379-80c4-71cc5adc97c7","Customize your storefront theme, pages, menus, and SEO","Online Store | Cartly Help Center","2026-10-06T07:41:10.106907Z",{"_1551":3274,"_1561":2614,"_1554":2615,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2616,"_1568":2617,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2618,"_1572":1636,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2619,"_1577":2620},[3275],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3276},{"_1555":2613},{"_1551":3278,"_1561":2483,"_1554":2484,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2485,"_1568":2486,"_1570":2431,"_1544":2487,"_1572":1636,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2488,"_1577":2489},[3279],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3280},{"_1555":2482},{"_1551":3282,"_1561":2626,"_1554":2627,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2628,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2629,"_1572":1636,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2630,"_1577":2631},[3283],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3284},{"_1555":2625},{"_1551":3286,"_1561":2637,"_1554":2638,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2639,"_1568":2640,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2641,"_1572":1649,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2642,"_1577":2643},[3287],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3288},{"_1555":2636},{"_1551":3290,"_1561":1846,"_1554":1847,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1848,"_1570":1783,"_1544":1849,"_1572":1649,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1850,"_1577":1851},[3291],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3292},{"_1555":1845},{"_1551":3294,"_1561":1644,"_1554":1645,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1646,"_1568":1647,"_1570":1545,"_1544":1648,"_1572":1649,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1650,"_1577":1651},[3295],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3296},{"_1555":1643},{"_1551":3298,"_1561":2827,"_1554":2828,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2829,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2830,"_1572":1649,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2831,"_1577":2832},[3299],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3300},{"_1555":2826},{"_1551":-5,"_1561":3302,"_1554":3303,"_1564":1565,"_1566":3304,"_1568":3305,"_1570":1567,"_1544":2286,"_1572":1649,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2287,"_1577":3306},"2026-06-05T11:51:11.05822Z","1f7e7497-a3c8-4a77-89d0-4a2ef8b59816","Create discounts, gift cards, email campaigns, and newsletters","Marketing & Discounts | Cartly Help Center","2026-10-06T07:41:10.113237Z",{"_1551":3308,"_1561":1728,"_1554":1729,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1730,"_1570":1666,"_1544":1731,"_1572":1649,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1732,"_1577":1733},[3309],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3310},{"_1555":1727},{"_1551":3312,"_1561":2153,"_1554":2154,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2155,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2156,"_1572":1649,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2157,"_1577":2158},[3313],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3314},{"_1555":2152},{"_1551":3316,"_1561":2649,"_1554":2650,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2651,"_1568":2652,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2653,"_1572":1649,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2654,"_1577":2655},[3317],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3318},{"_1555":2648},{"_1551":3320,"_1561":1739,"_1554":1740,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1741,"_1570":1666,"_1544":1742,"_1572":1662,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1743,"_1577":1744},[3321],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3322},{"_1555":1738},{"_1551":3324,"_1561":2838,"_1554":2839,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2840,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2841,"_1572":1662,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2842,"_1577":2843},[3325],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3326},{"_1555":2837},{"_1551":3328,"_1561":2661,"_1554":2662,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2663,"_1568":2664,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2665,"_1572":1662,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2666,"_1577":2667},[3329],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3330},{"_1555":2660},{"_1551":3332,"_1561":2164,"_1554":2165,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2166,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2167,"_1572":1662,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2168,"_1577":2169},[3333],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3334},{"_1555":2163},{"_1551":3336,"_1561":1941,"_1554":1942,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1943,"_1570":1900,"_1544":1944,"_1572":1662,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1945,"_1577":1946},[3337],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3338},{"_1555":1940},{"_1551":3340,"_1561":2673,"_1554":2674,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2675,"_1568":2676,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2677,"_1572":1662,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2678,"_1577":2679},[3341],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3342},{"_1555":2672},{"_1551":3344,"_1561":1857,"_1554":1858,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1859,"_1568":1860,"_1570":1783,"_1544":1861,"_1572":1662,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1862,"_1577":1863},[3345],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3346},{"_1555":1856},{"_1551":-5,"_1561":3348,"_1554":3349,"_1564":1565,"_1566":3350,"_1568":3351,"_1570":1567,"_1544":2431,"_1572":1662,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2432,"_1577":3352},"2026-06-05T11:51:11.060166Z","9e4a5862-b071-4cd3-ba48-83dd00063752","Configure Stripe payments, subscriptions, currencies, and taxes","Payments & Billing | Cartly Help Center","2026-10-06T07:41:10.120025Z",{"_1551":3354,"_1561":1657,"_1554":1658,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1659,"_1568":1660,"_1570":1545,"_1544":1661,"_1572":1662,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1663,"_1577":1664},[3355],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3356},{"_1555":1656},{"_1551":3358,"_1561":2849,"_1554":2850,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2851,"_1568":2852,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2853,"_1572":1754,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2854,"_1577":2855},[3359],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3360},{"_1555":2848},{"_1551":-5,"_1561":3362,"_1554":3363,"_1564":1565,"_1566":3364,"_1568":3365,"_1570":1567,"_1544":2563,"_1572":1754,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2564,"_1577":3366},"2026-06-05T11:51:11.062457Z","65af5608-ec8f-49ff-b423-0b4deb0f4dac","Browse the marketplace, install apps, and configure integrations","Apps & Integrations | Cartly Help Center","2026-10-06T07:41:10.127548Z",{"_1551":3368,"_1561":2495,"_1554":2496,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2497,"_1568":2498,"_1570":2431,"_1544":2499,"_1572":1754,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2500,"_1577":2501},[3369],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3370},{"_1555":2494},{"_1551":3372,"_1561":1750,"_1554":1751,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1752,"_1570":1666,"_1544":1753,"_1572":1754,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1755,"_1577":1756},[3373],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3374},{"_1555":1749},{"_1551":3376,"_1561":1869,"_1554":1870,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1871,"_1568":1872,"_1570":1783,"_1544":1873,"_1572":1754,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1874,"_1577":1875},[3377],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3378},{"_1555":1868},{"_1551":3380,"_1561":2685,"_1554":2686,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2687,"_1568":2688,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2689,"_1572":1754,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2690,"_1577":2691},[3381],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3382},{"_1555":2684},{"_1551":3384,"_1561":2507,"_1554":2508,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2509,"_1570":2431,"_1544":2510,"_1572":1754,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2511,"_1577":2512},[3385],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3386},{"_1555":2506},{"_1551":3388,"_1561":1952,"_1554":1953,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1954,"_1568":1955,"_1570":1900,"_1544":1956,"_1572":1754,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1957,"_1577":1958},[3389],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3390},{"_1555":1951},{"_1551":3392,"_1561":2175,"_1554":2176,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":2177,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2178,"_1572":1754,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2179,"_1577":2180},[3393],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3394},{"_1555":2174},{"_1551":3396,"_1561":2398,"_1554":2399,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2400,"_1568":2401,"_1570":2286,"_1544":2402,"_1572":1766,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2403,"_1577":2404},[3397],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3398},{"_1555":2397},{"_1551":3400,"_1561":2697,"_1554":2698,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2699,"_1568":2700,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2701,"_1572":1766,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2702,"_1577":2703},[3401],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3402},{"_1555":2696},{"_1551":3404,"_1561":1881,"_1554":1882,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1883,"_1568":1884,"_1570":1783,"_1544":1885,"_1572":1766,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1886,"_1577":1887},[3405],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3406},{"_1555":1880},{"_1551":3408,"_1561":2861,"_1554":2862,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2863,"_1568":2864,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2865,"_1572":1766,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2866,"_1577":2867},[3409],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3410},{"_1555":2860},{"_1551":3412,"_1561":2518,"_1554":2519,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2520,"_1568":2521,"_1570":2431,"_1544":2522,"_1572":1766,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2523,"_1577":2524},[3413],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3414},{"_1555":2517},{"_1551":-5,"_1561":3416,"_1554":3417,"_1564":1565,"_1566":3418,"_1568":3419,"_1570":1567,"_1544":1558,"_1572":1766,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2765,"_1577":3420},"2026-06-05T11:51:11.065298Z","2df92f72-9e13-42bc-8387-72fbd85518e2","General settings, shipping zones, team members, and audit logs","Settings & Configuration | Cartly Help Center","2026-10-06T07:41:10.135774Z",{"_1551":3422,"_1561":1762,"_1554":1763,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1567,"_1568":1764,"_1570":1666,"_1544":1765,"_1572":1766,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1767,"_1577":1768},[3423],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3424},{"_1555":1761},{"_1551":3426,"_1561":2873,"_1554":2874,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2875,"_1568":2876,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2877,"_1572":2535,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2878,"_1577":2879},[3427],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3428},{"_1555":2872},{"_1551":3430,"_1561":2530,"_1554":2531,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2532,"_1568":2533,"_1570":2431,"_1544":2534,"_1572":2535,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2536,"_1577":2537},[3431],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3432},{"_1555":2529},{"_1551":3434,"_1561":2885,"_1554":2886,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2887,"_1568":2888,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2889,"_1572":2535,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2890,"_1577":2891},[3435],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3436},{"_1555":2884},{"_1551":3438,"_1561":2543,"_1554":2544,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2545,"_1568":2546,"_1570":2431,"_1544":2547,"_1572":1779,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2548,"_1577":2549},[3439],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3440},{"_1555":2542},{"_1551":3442,"_1561":1774,"_1554":1775,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1776,"_1568":1777,"_1570":1666,"_1544":1778,"_1572":1779,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1780,"_1577":1781},[3443],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3444},{"_1555":1773},{"_1551":3446,"_1561":1893,"_1554":1894,"_1564":1565,"_1566":1895,"_1568":1896,"_1570":1783,"_1544":1897,"_1572":1779,"_1574":1575,"_1546":1898,"_1577":1893},[3447],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3448},{"_1555":1892},{"_1551":3450,"_1561":2709,"_1554":2710,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2711,"_1568":2712,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2713,"_1572":1779,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2714,"_1577":2715},[3451],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3452},{"_1555":2708},{"_1551":-5,"_1561":3454,"_1554":3455,"_1564":1565,"_1566":3456,"_1568":3457,"_1570":1567,"_1544":2980,"_1572":1779,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2981,"_1577":3458},"2026-06-05T11:51:11.068113Z","3ea8edb8-2bb1-4f15-bdeb-2c7719762bbe","Bulk import products via CSV and manage import profiles","Import & Export | Cartly Help Center","2026-10-06T07:41:10.143089Z",{"_1551":3460,"_1561":2897,"_1554":2898,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2899,"_1568":2900,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2901,"_1572":1779,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2902,"_1577":2903},[3461],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3462},{"_1555":2896},{"_1551":3464,"_1561":2410,"_1554":2411,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2412,"_1568":2413,"_1570":2286,"_1544":2414,"_1572":1779,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2415,"_1577":2416},[3465],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3466},{"_1555":2409},{"_1551":3468,"_1561":2422,"_1554":2423,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2424,"_1568":2425,"_1570":2286,"_1544":2426,"_1572":2427,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2428,"_1577":2429},[3469],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3470},{"_1555":2421},{"_1551":3472,"_1561":2555,"_1554":2556,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2557,"_1568":2558,"_1570":2431,"_1544":2559,"_1572":2427,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2560,"_1577":2561},[3473],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3474},{"_1555":2554},{"_1551":3476,"_1561":2721,"_1554":2722,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2723,"_1568":2724,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2725,"_1572":2427,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2726,"_1577":2727},[3477],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3478},{"_1555":2720},{"_1551":3480,"_1561":2909,"_1554":2910,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2911,"_1568":2912,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2913,"_1572":2427,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2914,"_1577":2915},[3481],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3482},{"_1555":2908},{"_1551":3484,"_1561":2921,"_1554":2922,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2923,"_1568":2924,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2925,"_1572":2926,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2927,"_1577":2928},[3485],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3486},{"_1555":2920},{"_1551":3488,"_1561":2733,"_1554":2734,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2735,"_1568":2736,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2737,"_1572":2191,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2738,"_1577":2739},[3489],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3490},{"_1555":2732},{"_1551":3492,"_1561":2186,"_1554":2187,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2188,"_1568":2189,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2190,"_1572":2191,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2192,"_1577":2193},[3493],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3494},{"_1555":2185},{"_1551":3496,"_1561":2934,"_1554":2935,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2936,"_1568":2937,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2938,"_1572":2939,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2940,"_1577":2941},[3497],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3498},{"_1555":2933},{"_1551":3500,"_1561":2745,"_1554":2746,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2747,"_1568":2748,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2749,"_1572":2750,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2751,"_1577":2745},[3501],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3502},{"_1555":2744},{"_1551":3504,"_1561":2947,"_1554":2948,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2949,"_1568":2950,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2951,"_1572":2750,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2952,"_1577":2953},[3505],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3506},{"_1555":2946},{"_1551":3508,"_1561":2199,"_1554":2200,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2201,"_1568":2202,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2203,"_1572":2204,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2205,"_1577":2206},[3509],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3510},{"_1555":2198},{"_1551":3512,"_1561":2959,"_1554":2960,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2961,"_1568":2962,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2963,"_1572":2762,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2964,"_1577":2965},[3513],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3514},{"_1555":2958},{"_1551":3516,"_1561":2757,"_1554":2758,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2759,"_1568":2760,"_1570":2563,"_1544":2761,"_1572":2762,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2763,"_1577":2757},[3517],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3518},{"_1555":2756},{"_1551":3520,"_1561":2971,"_1554":2972,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2973,"_1568":2974,"_1570":1558,"_1544":2975,"_1572":2976,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2977,"_1577":2978},[3521],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3522},{"_1555":2970},{"_1551":3524,"_1561":2212,"_1554":2213,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2214,"_1568":2215,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2216,"_1572":2217,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2218,"_1577":2219},[3525],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3526},{"_1555":2211},{"_1551":3528,"_1561":2225,"_1554":2226,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2227,"_1568":2228,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2229,"_1572":2230,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2231,"_1577":2232},[3529],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3530},{"_1555":2224},{"_1551":3532,"_1561":2238,"_1554":2239,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2240,"_1568":2241,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2242,"_1572":2243,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2244,"_1577":2245},[3533],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3534},{"_1555":2237},{"_1551":3536,"_1561":2251,"_1554":2252,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2253,"_1568":2254,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2255,"_1572":2256,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2257,"_1577":2258},[3537],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3538},{"_1555":2250},{"_1551":3540,"_1561":2264,"_1554":2265,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2266,"_1568":2267,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2268,"_1572":2269,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2270,"_1577":2271},[3541],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3542},{"_1555":2263},{"_1551":3544,"_1561":2277,"_1554":2278,"_1564":1565,"_1566":2279,"_1568":2280,"_1570":1960,"_1544":2281,"_1572":2282,"_1574":1575,"_1546":2283,"_1577":2284},[3545],{"_1554":1555,"_1556":1557,"_1558":3546},{"_1555":2276},"platformTracking",{"_3549":3550},"ga4_id","G-60RNS74MZB","actionData","errors"]

Search Help